Canon Digital Camera SX7000 User Manual

Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Camera User Guide  
Reading this guide will hp you leato use the camera  
properly.  
Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.  
ENGLISH  
: Next page  
: Previous page  
: Page before you clicked a link  
To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter  
title at right.  
Index  
Store this guide safely so that can use it in the  
future.  
From chapter title pages, you can access topics by  
clicking their titles.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
©CANON INC. 2014  
CDD-E565-020  
1
Before Use  
Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in brackets.  
: Important information you should know  
: Notes and tips for expert camera use  
Part Names and Conventions in This Guide  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
=xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents a  
page number)  
Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.  
For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as  
the “memory card”.  
The tabs shown above titles indicate whether the function is used for still  
images, movies, ooth.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Still Imag
:
Indicates that the function is used when shooting or  
iewing still images.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
es  
ndicates that the function is used when shooting or  
wing movies.  
Microphone  
Lamp  
Lens  
Flash  
N-Mark *  
(
)
<h(Flash up)> switc
(Framing Assist – eek)>  
Zoom lever  
<
button  
Tripod socket  
Shooting: <i(telephoto)> /  
Index  
<j(wide angle)>  
Playback: <k(magnify)> /  
<g(index)>  
Movie button  
DC coupler terminal cover  
Memory card/battery cover  
Strap mount  
Shutter button  
Power button  
Wi-Fi antenna area  
* Used with NFC features (=119).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
     
Before Use  
In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera  
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.  
The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.  
<o> Up button on back  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
<q> Left button on back  
<r> Right button on back  
<p> Down button on back  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
<5> Control dial on back  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Screen (LCD monitor)  
Speaker  
AV OUT (Audio/video output) /  
DIGITAL terminal  
HDMITM terminal  
Mode dial  
<l(Display)> button  
(Mobile device connection)>  
button  
<
<b(Exposure compsation)> /  
<
(Wi-Fi)> / Up bun  
<h(Flash)> / Right bn  
FUNC./SET button  
<Q(Self-timer)> / <a(Sing
image erase)> / Down button  
<1(Playback)> button  
Control dial  
<e(Macro)> / <f(Manual  
focus)> / Left button  
Index  
<n> button  
Indicator  
zzTurning the control dial is one way to  
choose setting items, switch images, and  
perform other operations. Most of these  
operations are also possible with the  
<o><p><q><r> buttons.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
 
Before Use  
Table of Contents  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Table of Contents...........................5  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Before Use  
Common Camera Operations  
Applying special effects  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
4
Shoot  
zzUse camera-determined settings  
(Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)..................................................... 28, 30  
Vivid Colors  
Poster Effect  
Fish-Eye Effect  
zzSee several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined  
settings (Creative Shot Mode) ............................................................. 53  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
(=57)  
(=57)  
(=58)  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Shooting people well  
P Mode  
Miniature t  
Toy Camera Effect  
Soft Focus  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
=58)  
(=59)  
(=60)  
I P  
Portraits  
Against Snow  
(=55)  
(=56)  
Mochrome  
(=0)  
Matching specific scenes  
zzWhile adjusting image settings (Live View Control) ............................. 54  
zzFocus on faces......................................................................... 28, 55, 76  
zzWithout using the flash (Flash Off)....................................................... 29  
zzInclude yourself in the shot (Self-Timer) ........................................ 37, 63  
zzAdd a date stamp................................................................................. 38  
zzUse Face ID................................................................................... 40, 92  
zzMovie clips and photos together (Movie Digest).................................. 30  
Sports  
Night Scenes  
Index  
(=54)  
(=56)  
t
Low Light  
Fireworks  
(=56)  
(=56)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
 
Before Use  
1
View  
Safety Precautions  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzView images (Playback Mode)............................................................. 89  
zzAutomatic playback (Slideshow).......................................................... 96  
zzOn a TV.............................................................................................. 157  
zzOn a computer ................................................................................... 161  
zzBrowse through images quickly ........................................................... 93  
zzErase images..................................................................................... 101  
Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions  
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.  
The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and other  
persons from being injured or incurring property damage.  
Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold  
accessories you use.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Warning  
enotes the possibility of serious injury or death.  
E
Shoot/View Movies  
P Mode  
Do not triggethe sh in close proximity to people’s eyes.  
Exposure to the night produced by the flash could damage eyesight.  
In partiemain ast 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants when  
usin
zzShoot movies ................................................................................. 28, 65  
zzView movies (Playback Mode)............................................................. 89  
zzFast-moving subjects, slow-motion playback....................................... 66  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Storuipment ot of the reach of children and infants.  
rap nd around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.  
r proct uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a  
neck ay result in asphyxiation.  
c
Print  
zzPrint pictures...................................................................................... 163  
Save  
only recommended power sources.  
zzSave images to a computer via a cable......................................... 161  
not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.  
Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.  
Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when  
dropped.  
Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange  
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.  
Use Wi-Fi Functions  
Index  
zzSend images to a smartphone............................................................115  
zzShare images online ...........................................................................116  
zzSend images to a computer............................................................... 139  
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to  
clean the product.  
Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects  
inside.  
This could result in electrical shock or fire.  
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the  
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
   
Before Use  
Do not look through the viewfinder (if your model has one) at intense  
light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense artificial  
light source.  
Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended  
periods.  
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature  
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot  
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
This could damage your eyesight.  
Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.  
This could result in electrical shock or fire. Immediately stop using the  
product and distance yourself from it.  
Caution  
Denotes the possibility of injury.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,  
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other  
objects.  
Be careful not to bmp or push strongly on the lens.  
This could lead njuor damage the camera.  
Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.  
Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame.  
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in  
electrical shock, fire, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into  
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately flush with water.  
If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.  
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away  
any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the  
power outlet, and the surrounding area.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Be ot to sect the screen to strong impacts.  
If the cks, injumay result from the broken fragments.  
Whethe flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or  
thin
ould sult in burns or damage to the flash.  
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.  
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated  
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do ot e if  
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.  
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keyso contact  
the terminals or plug.  
d using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:  
ces subject to direct sunlight  
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)  
- Humid or dusty places  
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the powcord,  
if your product uses one.  
This could result in electrical shock or fire.  
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery  
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other injuries.  
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other  
injuries.  
Index  
Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.  
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the  
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate  
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices is  
restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.  
The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed  
for prolonged periods.  
When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters (if  
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly.  
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the  
shards of glass may lead to cuts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Before Use  
On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure  
to avoid pinching your fingers with the lowering flash.  
This could result in injury.  
If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that  
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and  
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –  
terminals reversed.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Denotes the possibility of property damage.  
Caution  
This may cause the product to malfunction.  
Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a  
clear day or an intense artificial light source.  
Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.  
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.  
When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do  
not come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that  
it faces the body), your product’s screen closes.  
Do not attacany rd objects to the product.  
Doing so may caufunctions or damage the screen.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be  
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.  
On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push  
the flash down or pry it open.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
This may cause the product to malfunction.  
Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the flash with a  
cotton swab or cloth.  
The heat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the  
product to malfunction.  
Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are ing  
the product.  
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.  
Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the teinals  
with tape or other insulators.  
Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.  
Index  
Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use.  
Do not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.  
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to  
overheat and distort, resulting in fire.  
Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.  
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or explosion,  
resulting in product damage or fire.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Basic Guide  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting and playback  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Initial Preparations........................................... 12 Trying the Camera .................. 16  
Attaching the Strap................................................12  
Holding the Camera ..............................................12  
Charging the Battery Pack ....................................12  
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card .......13  
Setting the Date and Time.....................................14  
Display Language .................................................16  
Shooting (Smart Aut................16  
Viewing...............................18  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
 
Before Use  
Charging the Battery Pack  
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to  
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the  
battery pack charged.  
Initial Preparations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Prepare for shooting as follows.  
Attaching the Strap  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Insert the battery pack.  
zzThread the end of the strap through the  
zzAfter aligning the marks on the battery  
pack and charger, insert the battery pack  
by pushing it in ( ) and down ( ).  
strap hole ( ), and then pull the other  
end of the strap through the loop on the  
threaded end ( ).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Charge the battery pack.  
zzCB-2LY: Flip out the plug ( ) and plug  
the charger into a power outlet ( ).  
zzCB-2LYE: Plug the power cord into the  
CB-2LY  
charger, then plug the other end into a  
power outlet.  
zzThe charging lamp turns orange, and  
charging begins.  
Holding the Camera  
zzWhen charging is finished, the lamp turns  
green.  
zzPlace the strap around your wr
zzWhen shooting, keep your arms cl
your body and hold the camera securely  
to prevent it from moving. If you have  
raised the flash, do not rest your fingers  
on it.  
Index  
CB-2LYE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
   
Before Use  
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card  
3 Remove the battery pack.  
zzAfter unplugging the battery charger,  
remove the battery pack by pushing it in  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).  
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted  
in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera  
(=149).  
(
) and up ( ).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Open the cover.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not  
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.  
zzSlide the cover ( ) and open it ( ).  
For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the  
charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction  
or damage to the product.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Insert the battery pack.  
zzWhile pressing the battery lock in the  
direction of the arrow, insert the battery  
pack as shown and push it in until it clicks  
into the locked position.  
For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time  
Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when they are not  
used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately before) the day
The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (60 Hz). For  
power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available apter for  
the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveliwhich may  
damage the battery pack.  
zzIf you insert the battery pack facing the  
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the  
correct position. Always confirm that the  
battery pack is facing the right way and  
Terminals  
Battery  
Lock  
locks when inserted.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
     
Before Use  
3 Check the card’s write-protect  
tab and insert the memory card.  
zzRecording is not possible on memory  
cards with a write-protect tab when the  
tab is in the locked position. Slide the tab  
to the unlocked position.  
Remove the memory card.  
zzPush the memory card in until it clicks,  
and then slowly release it.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzThe memory card will pop up.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzInsert the memory card facing as shown  
until it clicks into the locked position.  
zzMake sure the memory card is facing the  
right way when you insert it. Inserting  
memory cards facing the wrong way may  
damage the camera.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Terminals  
P Mode  
Setting he ate and Time  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Set the nt date time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen  
is den you tthe camera on. Information you specify this way  
is recmage propies when you shoot, and it is used when you  
anages by shooting date or print images showing the date.  
can o add a date stamp to shots, if you wish (=38).  
4 Close the cover.  
zzLower the cover ( ) and hold it down as  
you slide it, until it clicks into the closed  
position ( ).  
1 Turn the camera on.  
zzPress the power button.  
zzThe [Date/Time] screen is displayed.  
For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be ved on one  
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card  
Index  
Remove the battery pack.  
zzOpen the cover and press the battery  
lock in the direction of the arrow.  
zzThe battery pack will pop up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
         
Before Use  
2 Set the date and time.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an  
option.  
Changing the Date and Time  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Adjust the date and time as follows.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to specify the date and time.  
zzWhen finished, press the <m> button.  
1 Access the camera menu.  
zzPress the <n> button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Choose [Date/Time].  
zzMove the zoom lever to choose the [3]  
tab.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Date/Time], and  
then press the <m> button.  
3 Set the home time zone.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose  
your home time zone.  
4 Finish the setup process.  
zzPress the <m> button when finished.  
After a confirmation messagehe sing  
screen is no longer displaye
zzTo turn off the camera, press e power  
button.  
3 Change the date and time.  
zzFollow step 2 in “Setting the Date and  
Time” (=15) to adjust the settings.  
zzPress the <n> button to close the  
menu.  
Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the camera’s built-in  
date/time battery (backup battery) after the battery pack is removed.  
The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you insert a  
charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit (sold  
separately, =156), even if the camera is left off.  
Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will be  
displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date and time as  
Index  
Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/Time]  
screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on. Specify  
the correct information.  
To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [  
] in step 2 and then  
choose [ ] by pressing the <o><p> buttons or turning the <5> dial.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
       
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Display Language  
Change the display language as needed.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Trying the Camera Out  
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or  
movies, and then view them.  
1 Enter Playback mode.  
zzPress the <1> button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Shooting (Smart Auto)  
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,  
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress and hold the <m> button, and  
then immediately press the <n>  
button.  
P Mode  
1 Turn the camera on.  
zzPress the power button.  
zzThe startup screen is displayed.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
3 Set the display language.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <5> dial to choose a language,  
and then press the <m> butt.  
zzOnce the display language hbeen set,  
the setting screen is no longeisplayed.  
2 Enter [  
] mode.  
zzSet the mode dial to [  
].  
zzAim the camera at the subject. The  
camera will make a slight clicking noise  
as it determines the scene.  
zzIcons representing the scene and image  
stabilization mode are displayed in the  
upper left of the screen.  
Index  
zzFrames displayed around any detected  
subjects indicate that they are in focus.  
The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after pressing the <m>  
button before you press the <n> button. In this case, press the <m> button  
to dismiss the time display and repeat step 2.  
You can also change the display language by pressing the <n> button  
and choosing [Language  
] on the [3] tab.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
     
Before Use  
3 Compose the shot.  
Shoot.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move  
the zoom lever toward <i> (telephoto),  
and to zoom away from the subject, move  
it toward <j> (wide angle).  
zzPress the shutter button all the way  
down.  
zzAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound  
is played, and in low-light conditions  
when you have raised the flash, it fires  
automatically.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
4 Shoot.  
Shooting Still Images  
Focus.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter  
sound ends.  
zzPress the shutter button lightly, halfway  
down. The camera beeps twice after  
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to  
indicate image areas in focus.  
zzAfter displaying your shot, the camera will  
revert to the shooting screen.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Shooting Movies  
Start shooting.  
zzPress the movie button. The camera  
beeps once as recording begins, and  
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time.  
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and  
bottom edges of the screen, and the  
subject is slightly enlarged. The black  
bars indicate image areas not recorded.  
zzFrames displayed around any detected  
faces indicate that they are in focus.  
zzOnce recording begins, take your finger  
off the movie button.  
psed Time  
zzIf [Raise the flash] appears on e screen
move the <h> switch to raise thash. I
will fire when shooting. If you prefer
to use the flash, push it down with your  
finger, into the camera.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
 
Before Use  
Viewing  
Finish shooting.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the movie button again to stop  
shooting. The camera beeps twice as  
recording stops.  
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as  
follows.  
1 Enter Playback mode.  
zzPress the <1> button.  
zzYour last shot is displayed.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
2 Browse through your images.  
zzTo view the previous image, press  
the <q> button or turn the <5> dial  
counterclockwise. To view the next  
image, press the <r> button or turn the  
<5> dial clockwise.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzPress and hold the <q><r> buttons to  
browse through images quickly.  
Index  
zzTo access Scroll Display mode, turn the  
5
5
<
<
> dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the  
> dial to browse through images.  
zzTo return to single-image display, press  
m
the < > button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
 
Before Use  
zzMovies are identified by a [  
play movies, go to step 3.  
] icon. To  
Erasing Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when  
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.  
1 Choose an image to erase.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an image.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
3 Play movies.  
2 Erase the image.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [  
]
zzPress the <p> button.  
P Mode  
(either press the <o><p> buttons or  
turn the <5> dial), and then press the  
<m> button again.  
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial to  
choose [Erase], and then press the <m>  
button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzPlayback now begins, and after the movie  
is finished, [  
] is displayed.  
zzThe current image is now erased.  
zzTo cancel erasure, press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <5> dial to choose  
[Cancel], and then press the <m>  
button.  
zzTo adjust the volume, press the <o><p>  
buttons.  
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shubutt
halfway.  
You can also erase all images at once (=102).  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Advanced Guide  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Camera Basics  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including shooting and playback options  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
On/Off................................................................ 21 Using the FUNC. M.................. 23  
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ........21  
Using Menus.......................... 24  
On-ScreKeyboard ................... 25  
IndicatoDisplay ................................. 26  
Clock ........................................................ 26  
Shutter Button.................................................. 22  
Shooting Modes ............................................... 22  
Shooting Display Options ............................... 23  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
 
Before Use  
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)  
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates  
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of  
inactivity.  
On/Off  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting Mode  
zzPress the power button to turn the  
camera on and prepare for shooting.  
zzTo turn the camera off, press the power  
button again.  
Power Saving in Shooting Mode  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity.  
In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself  
off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off  
but the lens is still oupress the shutter button halfway (=22).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Playback Mode  
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera  
on and view your shots.  
P Mode  
Power Sang Playback Mode  
The camera turns ff automatically after about five minutes of  
inactiv
zzTo turn the camera off, press the <1>  
button again.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
deactivate APower Down and adjust the timing of Display Off, if  
fer (=148).  
Per saving is not active while the camera is connected to other devices via  
To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the <1> button.  
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button  
halfway (=22).  
The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera is in  
Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is retted
pressing the <1> button.  
Wi-=113), or when connected to a computer (=161).  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
       
Before Use  
Shutter Button  
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter  
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all  
the way down to shoot.  
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the  
button halfway or all the way down.  
Shooting Modes  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.  
Live View Control Mode  
P, Tv, Av, and M Modes  
Customize image brightness  
or colors when shooting  
(=54).  
Take a variety of shots using  
your preferred settings  
(=68, 84).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to  
focus.)  
zzPress the shutter button halfway. The  
camera beeps twice, and AF frames are  
displayed around image areas in focus.  
P Mode  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mod
Fully autshootinh  
camed settin
(=1
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Movie Mode  
For shooting movies  
(=65).  
You can also shoot movies  
when the mode dial is not  
set to Movie mode, simply  
by pressing the movie  
button.  
2 Press all the way down. (From  
the halfway position, press fully  
to shoot.)  
zzThe camera shoots, as a shur sod  
is played.  
tive t Mode  
n cape multiple still  
with ects using  
determined settings  
Creative Filters Mode  
Add a variety of effects to images  
when shooting (=57).  
zzKeep the camera still until thhutter  
sound ends.  
Sports Mode  
Shoot continuously as the camera  
focuses on moving subjects (=54).  
Index  
Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the  
shutter button halfway.  
Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time  
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,  
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject  
moves) before the shutter sound ends.  
Scene Mode  
Shoot with optimal settings for  
specific scenes (=55).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
   
Before Use  
Shooting Display Options  
Press the <l> button to view other information on the screen, or to hide  
Using the FUNC. Menu  
Configure commonly used functions through the FUNC. menu as follows.  
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode  
(=182 183) or playback mode (=188).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Access the FUNC. menu.  
zzPress the <m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Information is displayed  
No information is displayed  
2 Choose a menu item.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose a menu item, and  
then press the <m> or <r> button.  
zzDepending on the menu item, functions  
can be specified simply by pressing the  
Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view function  
when you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how shots  
are composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not match the  
brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image distortion or jerky  
subject motion will not affect recorded images.  
<m> or <r> button, or another screen is  
displayed for configuring the function.  
Optio
Items  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
       
Before Use  
3 Choose an option.  
Using Menus  
Configure a variety of camera functions through other menus as follows.  
Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting [4],  
playback [1], and so on. Note that available menu items vary depending  
on the selected shooting or playback mode (=184 188).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an option.  
zzOptions labeled with a [  
be configured by pressing the <l>  
button.  
] icon can  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzTo return to the menu items, press the  
<q> button.  
1 Access the menu.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <n> button.  
4 Finish the setup process.  
zzPress the <m> button.  
P Mode  
zzThe screen before you pressed the  
<m> button in step 1 is displayed again,  
showing the option you configured.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Choose a tab.  
zzMove the zoom lever to choose a tab.  
zzAfter you have pressed the <o><p>  
buttons or turned the <5> dial to choose  
a tab initially, you can switch between  
tabs by pressing the <q><r> buttons.  
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default  
settings (=152).  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
   
Before Use  
3 Choose a menu item.  
On-Screen Keyboard  
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (=41),  
Wi-Fi connections (=123), and so on. Note that the length and type of  
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose a menu item.  
zzFor menu items with options not shown,  
first press the <m> or <r> button to  
switch screens, and then either press the  
<o><p> buttons or turn the <5> dial  
to select the menu item.  
Number of Available Characters  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Entering Characters  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <5> dial to choose a character,  
and then press the <m> button to enter it.  
zzThe amount of information you can enter varies  
depending on the function you are using.  
Moving the Cursor  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzTo return to the previous screen, press  
the <n> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
4 Choose an option.  
zzChoose [ ] or [ ] and press the <m>  
button.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an  
option.  
Entering Line Breaks  
zzChoose [  
Switching Input Modes  
zzTo switch to numbers or symbols, choose  
5 Finish the setup process.  
zzPress the <n> button to reto the  
screen displayed before you essed the  
<n> button in step 1.  
] and press the <m> button.  
[
] and press the <m> button.  
zzTo switch between uppercase and  
lowercase letters, choose [ ] and press  
the <m> button.  
Index  
zzAvailable input modes vary depending on  
the function you are using.  
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default  
settings (=152).  
Deleting Characters  
zzChoose [ ] and press the <m> button.  
The previous character will be deleted.  
Confirming Input and Returning to  
the Previous Screen  
zzPress the <n> button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
     
Before Use  
Indicator Display  
Clock  
You can check the current time.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
The indicator on the back of the camera (=4) lights up or blinks  
depending on the camera status.  
Indicator  
Status  
zzPress and hold the <m> button.  
zzThe current time appears.  
zzIf you hold the camera vertically while  
using the clock function, it will switch  
to vertical display. Press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <5> dial to change  
the display color.  
Color  
Camera Status  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Connected to a computer (=161), or display off  
(=21, 148, 148)  
On  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Green  
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting images,  
Blinking shooting long exposures (=85, 86), or connecting/  
transmitting via Wi-Fi  
P Mode  
zzPress the <m> button again to cancel  
the clock display.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open the  
memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which may  
corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.  
Whthe camera is off, press and hold the <m> button, then press the power  
buttoto display the clock.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
 
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode  
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Shooting with Camera-Determined  
Settings............................................................ 28  
Shooting (Smart Auto)...........................................28  
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode...............................30  
Scene Icons ..........................................................32  
Image Stabilization Icons ......................................33  
On-Screen Frames................................................34  
Common, Convenient Features...................... 34  
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .....34  
Reacquiring Subjects Lost after Zooming  
(Framing Assist – Seek)........................................35  
Constantly Displaying Faces at the Same Size ....35  
Using the Self-Timer..............................................37  
Adding a Date Stamp............................................38  
Continuous Shooting.............................................39  
Using Face ID .......................... 40 Customizing Camera Operation ..................... 50  
Registering Face ID ................40  
Shootin...............................42  
Checkiand Editing Rormation.......43  
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam..........................50  
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp ..........50  
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots......51  
Image Ctomization Fea....................... 46  
Changinhe Aspecatio....................................46  
Changing age Relution (Size) .......................46  
Red-Eye Cor..............................................47  
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from  
Mercury Lamps .....................................................47  
Changing Movie Image Quality.............................48  
Index  
Helpful Shooting Features .............................. 48  
Displaying Grid Lines ............................................48  
Magnifying the Area in Focus................................49  
Checking for Closed Eyes.....................................49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
 
Before Use  
Shooting with Camera-Determined  
Settings  
3 Compose the shot.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzTo zoom in or out quickly, move the zoom  
lever all the way toward <i> (telephoto)  
or <j> (wide angle), and to zoom in  
or out slowly, move it just a little in the  
desired direction.  
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,  
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.  
Zoom Bar  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Still Images  
Movies  
Shooting (Smart Auto)  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Turn the camera on.  
P Mode  
Focus Range (rox.
zzPress the power button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzThe startup screen is displayed.  
4 Shoot.  
Shooting Still Images  
Focus.  
2 Enter [  
] mode.  
zzSet the mode dial to [  
zzPress the shutter button halfway. The  
camera beeps twice after focusing, and  
AF frames are displayed to indicate  
image areas in focus.  
].  
zzAim the camera at the subject. The  
camera will make a slight clicng nose  
as it determines the scene.  
zzSeveral AF frames are displayed when  
multiple areas are in focus.  
zzIcons representing the scene d image  
stabilization mode are displayen the  
upper left of the screen (=32, 33
zzFrames displayed around any detected  
subjects indicate that they are in focus.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
         
Before Use  
zzIf [Raise the flash] appears on the screen,  
move the <h> switch to raise the flash. It  
will fire when shooting. If you prefer not  
to use the flash, push it down with your  
finger, into the camera.  
Resize the subject and  
recompose the shot as needed.  
zzTo resize the subject, repeat the  
operations in step 3 (=28).  
However, note that the sound of camera  
operations will be recorded, and movies  
shot at zoom factors shown in blue will  
look grainy.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Shoot.  
zzPress the shutter button all the way  
down.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzWhen you recompose shots, the  
focus, brightness, and colors will be  
automatically adjusted.  
zzAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound  
is played, and in low-light conditions  
when you have raised the flash, it fires  
automatically.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Finish shooting.  
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter  
sound ends.  
zzPress the movie button again to stop  
shooting. The camera beeps twice as  
recording stops.  
zzAfter displaying your shot, the camera will  
revert to the shooting screen.  
zzRecording will stop automatically when  
the memory card becomes full.  
Shooting Movies  
Start shooting.  
zzPress the movie button. The mera  
beeps once as recording beginand  
The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has automatically  
attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main subject and background (Multi-  
area White Balance).  
[
Rec] is displayed with the elap
Index  
Elapsed Time  
time.  
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and  
bottom edges of the screen, and the  
subject is slightly enlarged. The black  
bars indicate image areas not recorded.  
zzFrames displayed around any detected  
faces indicate that they are in focus.  
zzOnce recording begins, take your finger  
off the movie button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
   
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [  
digest movies are recorded for each shot.  
A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image  
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ ] mode, or  
operating the camera in other ways.  
] mode, because  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode  
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The  
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are  
later combined in a digest movie.  
Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded  
in digest movies.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Enter [ ] mode.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzFollow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”  
(=28) and choose [ ].  
Digest movie quality is [  
] and cannot be changed.  
Sounds are noyed when you press the shutter button halfway or trigger  
the self-timer (=46).  
Digest maaved as separate movie files in the following cases even if  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
ere recon the same day in [ ] mode.  
2 Compose the shot.  
est movie size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the total recording  
ches apprmately 13 minutes and 20 seconds.  
zzFollow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart  
Auto)” (=28) to compose the shot and  
focus.  
gest movie is protected (=98).  
- light saving time (=15) or time zone (=147) settings are changed.  
- A w folder is created (=151).  
Recoded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased.  
If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust the setting in  
advance. Choose MENU (=24) > [4] tab > [Digest Type] > [No Stills].  
Individual chapters can be edited (=112).  
zzFor more impressive digest movies,  
aim the camera at subjects abr  
seconds before shooting still ages.  
3 Shoot.  
zzFollow step 4 in “Shooting (Smt Auto)”  
(=28) to shoot a still image.  
Digest Movie Playback  
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play a digest movie, or specify the  
date of the digest movie to play (=91).  
Index  
zzThe camera records both a still image  
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with  
the still image and a shutter sound, forms  
a single chapter in the digest movie.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
     
Before Use  
Still Images/Movies  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
If the camera is turned on while the <l> button is held down,  
the camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press  
the <n> button and choose [Mute] on the [3] tab, and then  
press the <q><r> buttons to choose [Off].  
The camera may become warm when shooting movies repeatedly  
over an extended period. This does not indicate damage.  
Before shooting a movie, lower the flash  
Microphone  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
with your finger. Be careful not to touch  
the microphone when shooting a movie.  
Leaving the flash raised, or blocking  
the microphone may prevent audio  
from being recorded or may cause the  
recording to sound muffled.  
Still Images  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred  
by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take  
other measures to keep it still.  
If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the  
The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when  
you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the focusing  
To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be  
activated when shooting in low-light conditions.  
A blinking [h] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot incates that  
shooting is not possible until the flash has finished rechargg. Shooting  
can resume as soon as the flash is ready, so either press tshutter  
button all the way down and wait, or release it and press it ag.  
The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and Bs  
(Sleeping) icons (=32) are displayed.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Avid toucamera controls other than the movie button when  
g moviebecause sounds made by the camera will be  
d.  
ovie recordng begins, the image display area changes and  
sects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant camera  
she. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting,  
adjuthe image stabilization setting (=83).  
Audio is recorded in stereo.  
Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can be reduced.  
However, the recording may sound unnatural when this option is used when  
there is no wind. When the wind is not strong, choose MENU (=24) >  
[4] tab > [Wind Filter] > [Off].  
Index  
Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen is  
displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus, brightness,  
and colors used.  
You can change how long images are displayed after shots (=51).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue, and the  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
background color of [ ] is orange.  
Scene Icons  
When shooting movies, only People, Other Subjects, and At Close Range icons will  
be displayed.  
In [ ] and [  
] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera  
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are  
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.  
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (=33).  
When shooting in [ ] mode, only People, Shadows on Face, Other Subjects, and At  
Close Range icons will be displayed.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
When shooting with the self-timer, People (In Motion), Smiling, Sleeping, Babies  
(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), Children, Other Subjects (In Motion) icons will not be  
displayed.  
Background  
Normal Backlit  
Dark*  
Sunsets Spotlights  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Subject  
People  
The following icons are ot displayed in drive modes other than [ ] (=33, 39),  
and when [Hg Lamp Cis set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected  
(=47): SmilineepiBabies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children.  
If the flash is set to e Backlit icons for Smiling and Children will not be  
disp
P Mode  
In Motion  
Shadows on Face  
Smiling  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
BabSmiling), ies (Sleeping), and Children icons will be displayed  
when s set to [On]nd the face of a registered baby (under two years old)  
child two to twelve years old) is detected (=40). Confirm beforehand that  
ate atime are correct (=14).  
Sleeping  
Babies  
Try shooting in [G] mode (=68) if the scene icon does not match  
actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot with your  
expected effect, color, or brightness.  
Smiling  
Sleeping  
Children (In Motion)  
Other Subjects  
In Motion  
Index  
At Close Range  
* Tripod Used  
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,  
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.  
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,  
and gray for all other backgrounds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
 
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Continuous Shooting Scenes  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Image Stabilization Icons  
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically  
applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in [  
If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed,  
the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway  
when one of the icons in the table below is displayed, one of the following  
icons will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous  
images: [ ], [ ], or [W].  
]
and [  
] modes.  
Image stabilization for movies,  
reducing strong camera shake,  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Image stabilization for still  
images (Normal)  
:
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera  
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save  
the image determined to be the best.  
as when shooting while walking  
(Dynamic)  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Smiling (including Babies)  
Sleeping (including Babies)  
Children  
Image stabilization for slow  
camera shake, such as when  
shooting movies at telephoto  
(Powered)  
P Mode  
Image stabilizafor still  
images n ping  
(Panning)*  
:
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by  
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera  
shake and image noise.  
The AF-assist beam will not light up, the flash will  
not fire, and the shutter sound will not be played.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
No image stabilization, because  
the camera is mounted on  
a tripod or held still by other  
means.  
abilization fmacro  
(Hybrid IS)  
Dng movie recording,  
W: So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children  
who move around, the camera will capture three  
consecutive images for each shot.  
However, during movie  
[
is displayed, and image  
recording, [  
] is displayed,  
stabization for macro movie  
recording is used.  
and image stabilization to  
In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, aimages  
may not look as expected.  
Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by thfirst shot
counteract wind or other sources  
of vibration is used (Tripod IS).  
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you follow  
subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera  
shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects moving  
vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake.  
Index  
When you want to shoot single images only, press the <m> button, ch
[
] in the menu, and then select [ ].  
To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (=82). In this case, an  
IS icon is not displayed.  
In [ ] mode, no [  
] icon is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Common, Convenient Features  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
On-Screen Frames  
] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects  
subjects you are aiming the camera at.  
Still Images  
Movies  
In [  
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)  
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,  
use digital zoom for up to about 120x enlargement.  
A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)  
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are  
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects  
within a certain range to keep them in focus.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1
Move the zoom lever toward <i>.  
However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white frame  
will remain on the screen.  
zzHold the lever until zooming stops.  
zzZooming stops at the largest possible zoom  
factor (before the image becomes noticeably  
grainy), which is then indicated on the screen.  
P Mode  
When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera  
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus and  
image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Factor  
2 Move the zoom lever toward  
<i> again.  
Try shooting in [G] mode (=68) if no frames are displayed, if  
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are  
displayed on the background or similar areas.  
zzThe camera zooms in even closer on the  
subject.  
Index  
Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates  
the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change depending  
on the zoom range.  
-
White range: optical zoom range where the image will not appear grainy.  
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not noticeably  
grainy (ZoomPlus).  
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy.  
Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution  
settings (=46), the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by  
following step 1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
     
Before Use  
To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (=24) > [4] tab > [Digital  
Some shooting information is not displayed while the camera is  
zoomed out.  
During movie shooting, the white frame is not displayed if you press  
the < > button. Also note that a changed zoom factor and camera  
operating sounds will be recorded.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Zoom] > [Off].  
Still Images  
Reacquiring Subjects Lost after Zooming  
(Framing Assist – Seek)  
Movies  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
If you prefer to shoot at the zoom factor of the screen in step 1, press the  
shutter button all the way down.  
You can adjust the zoom factor that the camera will revert to after Zoom  
Framing Assist (when you release the < > button) by moving the zoom lever  
as you hold the > button to resize the white frame.  
If you lose track of a subject while zooming in, you can find it more easily by  
temporarily zooming out.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
To adjust how mh the camera zooms out when the < > button is pressed,  
access U (24) and choose one of the three levels in [4] tab >  
1 Look for the lost subject.  
zzPress and hold the < > button.  
zzThe camera zooms out and displays a  
white frame around the area previously  
[
Display
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
m factor not be changed with the < > button after you press the  
utton all tway down in self-timer mode (=37).  
Still Images  
Movies  
shown (before you pressed the <  
button).  
>
Conantly Displaying Faces at the Same Size  
a pern’s face is detected (=76), the camera will try to maintain  
ant face size relative to the screen. If the person moves closer, the  
a will automatically zoom out, and vice versa.  
1 Determine the desired face size.  
zzMove the zoom lever as needed until the  
face is the desired size, relative to the  
screen.  
Index  
2 Reacquire the subject.  
2 Enter Auto mode.  
zzPress and release the < > button  
quickly.  
zzAim the camera so that the subject enters  
the white frame, and then release the  
<
> button.  
zz[ Auto: On] is displayed.  
zzThe previous magnification is now  
restored, so that the area outlined in  
white fills the screen again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
3 Choose the face.  
zzOnce faces are detected, [ ] is  
displayed.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Easily Reacquiring Lost Subjects  
If zooming in causes you to lose track of a subject, and you move the  
camera to look for them, the camera can automatically zoom out to help you  
find the subject.  
zzIf multiple faces are detected, press  
the <o> button to switch to the desired  
subject.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Enter Auto mode (=35).  
zz[ ] is displayed around the face that  
the camera will continue to display at the  
same size.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Look for the lost subject.  
zzWhen you move the camera to look for  
the subject, the camera zooms out to  
help you find them.  
4 Shoot.  
P Mode  
zzEven after you shoot, [ ] remains  
around the face displayed at a constant  
size.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
3 Reacquire the subject.  
zzOnce you find the subject and stop  
moving the camera, the camera zooms  
in again.  
zzTo cancel constant face size display,  
press the < > button again. [ Auto:  
Off] is displayed.  
Faces may not be displayed at a constant size at some om  
factors, or if the subject’s head is tilted or facing the cara  
indirectly.  
During movie recording, a changed zoom factor and cama  
operating sounds will be recorded.  
Index  
In  
Auto mode, some shooting information is not displayed,
some shooting settings cannot be configured.  
If the person whose face is framed with [ ] moves toward the edge of the  
screen, the camera zooms out to keep the person in view.  
In step 3, switching [ ] to another face with the <o> button is not possible  
during movie recording.  
The zoom factor will remain the same after you press the shutter button all the  
way down in self-timer mode (=37), even if the relative face size changes.  
4 Shoot.  
zzTo cancel this mode, press the <  
>
button again. [ Auto: Off] is displayed.  
Zooming is not possible while the shutter button is pressed halfway.  
MENU (=24) > [4] tab > [  
Auto] > [Off].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
zzOnce you start the self-timer, the lamp  
will blink and the camera will play a self-  
timer sound.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Using the Self-Timer  
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other timed  
shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter  
button.  
zzTwo seconds before the shot, the blinking  
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will  
remain lit in case the flash fires.)  
zzTo cancel shooting after you have  
triggered the self-timer, press the  
<n> button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <p> button, choose []] (either  
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzTo restore the original setting, choose  
P Mode  
[
] in step 1.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzOnce the setting is complete, []] is  
displayed.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Usine Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake  
optiodelays shutter release until about two seconds after you have  
d thhutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing  
tter button, it will not affect your shot.  
2 Shoot.  
zzFollow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”  
(=37) and choose [[].  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [[] is  
zzFor Still Images: Press the sher button  
halfway to focus on the subjectnd then  
press it all the way down.  
Index  
displayed.  
zzFor Movies: Press the movie button.  
zzFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”  
(=37) to shoot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
         
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Adding a Date Stamp  
The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-right corner.  
However, note that date stamps cannot be edited or removed, so confirm  
beforehand that the date and time are correct (=14).  
Customizing the Self-Timer  
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).  
1 Choose [$].  
zzFollowing step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”  
(=37), choose [$] and press the  
<n> button immediately.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Configure the setting.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Date  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
[Delay] or [Shots].  
Stamp  
] on the [4] tab, and then  
P Mode  
choose the desired option (=24).  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is  
displayed.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose a value, and then  
press the <m> button.  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [$] is  
displayed.  
zzFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-er”  
(=37) to shoot.  
2 Shoot.  
zzAs you take shots, the camera adds the  
shooting date or time to the lower-right  
corner of images.  
For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents thelay  
before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.  
Index  
zzTo restore the original setting, choose  
[Off] in step 1.  
When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white balance are  
determined by the first shot. More time is required between shots when the  
flash fires or when you have specified to take many shots. Shooting will stop  
automatically when the memory card becomes full.  
Date stamps cannot be edited or removed.  
When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds before the  
shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (The lamp will  
remain lit in case the flash fires.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
     
Before Use  
During continuous shooting, focus and exposure are locked at the  
position/level determined when you pressed the shutter button  
halfway.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one as follows.  
However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already have one may  
cause it to be printed twice.  
Cannot be used with the self-timer (=37).  
- Print using printer functions (=163)  
- Use camera DPOF print settings (=167) to print  
- Use the software downloaded from the Canon website (=160) to print  
Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow  
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the  
zoom position.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.  
Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.  
Multi-area WBalance (=29) is not available. Similarly, [Hg  
Lamp Crr.] (47) is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Still Images  
Continuous Shooting  
P Mode  
In [  
] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
continuously.  
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting  
Speed” (=190).  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose  
[
] in the menu, and then chse ]  
(=23).  
zzOnce the setting is completeW] is  
displayed.  
Index  
2 Shoot.  
zzHold the shutter button all the way down  
to shoot continuously.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
 
Before Use  
Registering Face ID Information  
You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12  
people to use with Face ID.  
Using Face ID  
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s  
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
shooting. In [  
] mode, the camera can detect babies and children based  
on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when shooting.  
This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered person  
among a large number of images (=93).  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Face  
ID Settings] on the [4] tab, and then  
press the <m> button (=24).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Personal Information  
Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with Face ID,  
and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved on the camera.  
Additionally, when registered people are detected, their names will be  
recorded in still images. When using the Face ID function, be careful  
when sharing the camera or images with others, and when posting  
images online where many others can view them.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Add to Registry],  
and then press the <m> button.  
When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after  
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces, names,  
and birthdays) from the camera (=45).  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Add a New Face],  
and then press the <m> button.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
       
Before Use  
2 Register face information.  
zzAim the camera so that the face of the  
person you want to register is inside the  
gray frame at the center of the screen.  
zzA white frame on the person’s face  
indicates that the face is recognized.  
Make sure a white frame is displayed on  
the face, and then shoot.  
zzTo register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile]  
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press  
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <5>  
dial), and then press the <m> button.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an  
option.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to specify the date.  
zzWhen finished, press the <m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzIf the face is not recognized, you cannot  
register face information.  
P Mode  
zzAfter [Register?] is displayed, press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial to  
choose [OK], and then press the <m>  
button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzThe [Edit Profile] screen is displayed.  
3 Register the person’s ame and  
birthday.  
zzPress the <m> button to accethe  
keyboard, and then enter the nam
(=25).  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
   
Before Use  
Shooting  
4 Save the settings.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Save], and then  
press the <m> button.  
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that person  
as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for that  
person when shooting.  
zzAfter a message is displayed, press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial to  
choose [Yes], and then press the <m>  
button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzWhen you point the camera toward a  
subject, the names of up to 3 registered  
people will be displayed when they are  
detected.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
5 Continue registering face  
information.  
P Mode  
zzShoot.  
zzTo register up to 4 more points of face  
information (expressions or angles),  
repeat step 2.  
zzDisplayed names will be recorded in still  
images. Even if people are detected, but  
their names are not displayed, the names  
(up to 5 people) will be recorded in the  
image.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzRegistered faces are more easily  
recognized if you add a variety of face  
information. In addition to a head-on  
angle, add a slight side angle, a ot  
when smiling, and shots insidand  
outside.  
Peoe other than those registered may be mistakenly detected as  
the registered person if they share similar facial features.  
The flash will not fire when following step 2.  
If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children
(=32) will not be displayed in [ ] mode.  
Index  
You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if you have not  
filled all 5 face info slots (=44).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
Before Use  
Checking and Editing Registered Information  
Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured image or  
scene differs drastically from the registered face information.  
If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected, overwrite registered  
information with new face info. Registering face info right before shooting will  
allow for easier detection of registered faces.  
If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you continue  
shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the image during  
playback (=95).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1 Access the [Check/Edit Info]  
screen.  
zzFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID  
Information” (=40), choose [Check/  
Edit Info] and press the <m> button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they grow, you should  
update their face info regularly (=44).  
When information display is set to off (=23), names will not display, but will  
be recorded in the image.  
If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose [Face ID  
Settings] on the [4] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose [Off].  
You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen (simple  
information display) (=90).  
In [ ] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen, but they will be  
recorded in still images.  
Names recorded in continuous shooting (=39, =79) will continue to be  
recorded in the same position as for the first shot, even if subjectov
P Mode  
2 Choose a person to check or  
edit.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <5> dial to choose the person  
to check or edit, and then press the <m>  
button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
3 Check or edit the information as  
needed.  
zzTo check a name or birthday, choose  
[Edit Profile] (either press the <o><p>  
buttons or turn the <5> dial), and  
then press the <m> button. On the  
screen displayed, you can edit names  
or birthdays as described in step 3  
of “Registering Face ID Information”  
(=41).  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
 
Before Use  
zzTo check face information, choose [Face  
Info List] (either press the <o><p>  
buttons or turn the <5> dial), and then  
press the <m> button. Press the <m>  
button on the screen displayed, choose  
face information to erase by pressing the  
<o><p><q><r> buttons or turning  
Overwriting and Adding Face Information  
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should  
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as  
their faces change quickly as they grow.  
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been  
filled.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
the <5> dial, and then press the <  
>
m
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Access the [Add Face Info]  
screen.  
zzFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID  
Information” (=40), choose [Add Face  
Info] and press the <m> button.  
button. After [Erase?] is displayed,  
choose [OK] (either press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <5> dial), and then  
press the <m> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in  
previously shot images will remain the same.  
2 Choose the name of the person  
to overwrite.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <5> dial to choose the name  
of a person whose face info you want  
to overwrite, and then press the <m>  
button.  
You can use the software (=160) to edit registered names. Some characters  
entered with the software may not display on the camera, but will ctly  
recorded in images.  
Index  
zzIf five items of face info have already  
been registered, a message will be  
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the < > dial),  
5
and then press the <m> button.  
zzIf less than five items of face info are  
registered, go to step 4 to add face  
information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
   
Before Use  
3 Choose the face info to  
overwrite.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <5> dial to choose the face info  
to overwrite, and then press the <m>  
button.  
Erasing Registered Information  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to Face  
ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be erased.  
1 Access the [Erase Info] screen.  
zzFollow step 1 in “Registering Face ID  
Information” (=40) and choose [Erase  
Info].  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
4 Register face information.  
zzFollow step 2 in “Registering Face ID  
Information” (=41) to shoot, and then  
register the new face information.  
zzRegistered faces are more easily  
recognized if you add a variety of face  
information. In addition to a head-on  
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot  
when smiling, and shots inside and  
outside.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Choose the name of the person  
whose info you want to erase.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <5> dial to choose the name  
of a person to erase, and then press the  
<m> button.  
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial to  
choose [OK], and then press the <m>  
button.  
You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filleFollow the  
steps above to overwrite face information.  
You can follow the above steps to register new face info when thes at leas
one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite any face information. Iad  
of overwriting face info, first erase unwanted existing info (=43), and then  
register new face information (=40) as needed.  
Index  
If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to  
display their name (=92), overwrite their info (=95), or  
search images for them (=93).  
You can also erase names in image information (=95).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
 
Before Use  
Still Images  
Image Customization Features  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Changing Image Resolution (Size)  
Still Images  
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on  
how many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card, see  
Changing the Aspect Ratio  
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=23).  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=23).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
zzOnce the setting is complete, the screen  
aspect ratio will be updated.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [ ].  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [ ].  
uidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper  
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.  
Size (for 4:3 Images)  
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)  
Same aspect ratio as 35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inor  
postcard sizes.  
zz[ ]: For e-mailing images.  
Index  
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, also used for display on standard-  
definition televisions or similar display devices, or for printing images at 3.5 x  
5-inch or A-series sizes.  
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5  
– 5.8 x 8.3 in.)  
5 x 7 in.  
Postcard  
3.5 x 5 in.  
Square aspect ratio.  
Not available in [ ] mode.  
Not available in [ ] mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Red-Eye Correction  
Red-eye that occurs in flash photography can be automatically corrected as  
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from  
Mercury Lamps  
follows.  
In [  
] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes  
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This  
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-  
area White Balance.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Access the [Flash Settings]  
screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Flash  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Hg  
Lamp Corr.] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose [On] (=24).  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is  
displayed.  
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press  
P Mode  
the < > button (=24).  
m
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [Off].  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzChoose [Red-Eye Corr.], and en  
choose [On] (=25).  
After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should set  
[Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not caused by  
mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [R
Index  
displayed.  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [Off].  
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results.  
In continuous shooting (=39), this setting is set to [Off] and cannot be  
changed.  
Red-eye correction may be applied to image areas other than eyes (if  
the camera misinterprets red eye makeup as red pupils, for example).  
You can also correct existing images (=109).  
You can also access the screen in step 2 when the flash is up by pressing the  
<r> button and immediately pressing the <n> button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
     
Before Use  
Movies  
Helpful Shooting Features  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Changing Movie Image Quality  
4 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum  
movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card,  
Still Images  
Movies  
Displaying Grid Lines  
Grid lines can be displayed on the screen for vertical and horizontal  
reference while shooting.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [  
in the menu, and choose the desired  
option (=23).  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
]
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Grid  
Lines] on the [4] tab, and then choose  
[On] (=24).  
zzOnce the setting is complete, grid lines  
are displayed on the screen.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [  
].  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [Off].  
Image  
Quality  
Resolution  
1920 x 1080  
Frame Rate  
Det
Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.  
60 fps  
30 fps  
30 fps  
30 fps  
For shooting in Full .  
[
smoother motion  
Index  
] enables movies with  
1920 x 1080  
1280 x 720  
640 x 480  
For shooting in HD  
For shooting in standard  
definition  
In [  
], [  
], and [  
] modes, black bars displayed on the top and  
bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
       
Before Use  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Magnifying the Area in Focus  
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will  
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.  
Checking for Closed Eyes  
] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed  
[
their eyes.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [AF-  
Point Zoom] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose [On] (=24).  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Blink  
Detection] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose [On] (=24).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Shoot.  
2 Check the focus.  
zzPress the shutter button halfy. The  
face detected as the main suct is now  
magnified.  
zz[ ] flashes when the camera detects a  
person whose eyes are closed.  
zzTo restore the original setting, choose  
[Off] in step 1.  
zzTo restore the original setting, chse  
[Off] in step 1.  
Index  
When you have specified multiple shots in [$] mode, this function is only  
available for the final shot.  
A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when you have  
selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display Time] (=51).  
This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [ ] mode  
(=33).  
The area in focus is not magnified in the following cases when the shutter  
button is pressed halfway.  
- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the camera and their  
face is too large for the screen, or if the camera detects subject movement  
- Digital zoom (=34): Not magnified with this feature  
- Tracking AF (=77): Not magnified with this feature  
- When using a TV as a display (=157)  
This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode (=39, 79).  
Not available in [ ] mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Customizing Camera Operation  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp  
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce red-  
Customize shooting functions on the MENU [4] tab as follows.  
eye when the flash is used in low-light shots.  
Still Images  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Access the [Flash Settings]  
screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Flash  
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press  
the <m> button (=24).  
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam  
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus when  
you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [AF-  
assist Beam] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose [Off] (=24).  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [On].  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzChoose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then  
choose [Off] (=25).  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [On].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots  
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is  
displayed immediately after shooting.  
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.  
1 Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],  
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
(=51).  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn  
the <5> dial to choose [Display Info].  
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose the  
desired option.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Access the [Review image after  
shooting] screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Review image after shooting] on the  
[4] tab, and then press the <m> button  
(=24).  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [Off].  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Display Time].  
Press the <q><r> buttons to the  
desired option.  
isplays only the image.  
splays shooting details (=179).  
d  
When [Display Time] (=51) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display Info] is set to  
[Off] and cannot be changed.  
By pressing the <l> button while an image is displayed after shooting,  
you can switch the display information. Note that the settings of [Display Info]  
are not changed. By pressing the <m> button, you can do the following  
operations.  
zzTo restore the original settingepeat this  
process but choose [Quick].  
Index  
Quick  
Displays images only until you can shoot again.  
2 sec., 4 sec., Displays images for the specified time. Even while the shot is displayed,  
- Protect (=98)  
- Favorites (=105)  
- Erase (=101)  
8 sec.  
Hold  
Off  
you can take another shot by pressing the shutter button halfway again.  
Displays images until you press the shutter button halfway.  
No image display after shots.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
       
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Other Shooting Modes  
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with unique image effects or captured using special  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
functions  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Enjoying a Variety of Images  
from Each Shot (Creative Shot)..................... 53  
Image Effects (Crea.................. 57 Shooting Various Movies ................................ 65  
Shooting with a Fisht  
(Fish-EyEffe...........................58  
Shots sembling Mini
Shooting Movies in [E] Mode ..............................65  
Shooting iFrame Movies .......................................66  
Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies ....................66  
Brightness / Color Customization  
(Live View Control) ......................................... 54  
(MiniatEffect).......................................58  
Shootinith a Toy mera Effect  
(Toy CamEffect) ..........................................59  
Shooting wiSoocus Effect .........................60  
Shooting in Monochrome ......................................60  
Auto Shooting after Face Detection  
Moving Subjects (Sports)................................ 54  
Specific Scenes................................................ 55  
Index  
(Smart Shutter)......................................................61  
High-Speed Continuous Shooting  
(High-Speed Burst HQ).........................................64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
   
Before Use  
Still Images  
Shooting will take some time when the flash fires, but hold the camera steady  
until the shutter sound is played three times.  
The six images are managed together as a group (=55).  
Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only available  
immediately after you shoot.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Enjoying a Variety of Images from  
Each Shot (Creative Shot)  
The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically  
applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the  
subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture  
multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings.  
Still Images  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Choosing Effects  
You can choose effects for images captured in [ ] mode.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Enter [ ] mode.  
P Mode  
zzAfter choosing [ ] mode, press the  
<l> button.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose the effect, and then  
press the <m> button.  
zzSet the mode dial to [ ].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Shoot.  
zzPress the shutter button all the way  
down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is  
played three times.  
zzAfter the six images are displayed  
in succession, they are displa
simultaneously for about two econds.  
zzTo keep the images displayentil  
you press the shutter button hway,  
press the <m> button. For full-een  
display in this state, choose an image by  
pressing the <o><p><q><r> buttons,  
and then press the <m> button.  
zzTo return to the original display, press the  
<n> button.  
uto  
All effects  
etro  
Images resemble old photos  
Images are generated in one color  
Bold, distinctive-looking images  
Subdued, natural-looking images  
Monochrome  
Special  
Natural  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Brightness / Color Customization  
(Live View Control)  
Movies  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Moving Subjects (Sports)  
Shoot continuously as the camera focuses on moving subjects.  
Image brightness or colors when shooting can be easily customized as  
follows.  
1 Enter [ ] mode.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzSet the mode dial to [ ].  
1 Enter [  
] mode.  
zzSet the mode dial to [  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
].  
P Mode  
2 Focus.  
zzWhile you are pressing the shutter button  
halfway, the camera will continue to  
adjust focus and image brightness where  
the blue frame is displayed.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <m> button to access the  
setting screen. Press the <o><p>  
buttons to choose a setting item, and  
then press the <q><r> buttons or turn  
3 Shoot.  
zzHold the shutter button all the way down  
to shoot continuously.  
5
the < > dial to adjust the vae aou  
watch the screen.  
zzShooting stops when you release the  
shutter button or reach the maximum  
number of shots, after which [Busy] is  
displayed and the shots are shown in the  
order you took them.  
zzPress the <m> button.  
3 Shoot.  
Index  
For brighter images, adjust the level to the right, and for darker  
images, adjust it to the left.  
Brightness  
Color  
Continuous shooting is not available in  
Auto mode (=35).  
For more vivid images, adjust the level to the right, and for more  
subdued images, adjust it to the left.  
For a warm, reddish tone, adjust the level to the right, and for a cool,  
bluish tone, adjust it to the left.  
Tone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
     
Before Use  
Specific Scenes  
In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed (=71) is  
increased to suit the shooting conditions.  
For details on the shooting range in [ ] mode, see “Shooting Range”  
There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can shoot again.  
Note that some types of memory cards may delay your next shot even longer.  
SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended.  
Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings,  
and the zoom position.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will  
automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.  
1 Enter [K] mode.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzSet the mode dial to [K].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Image Display during Playback  
2 Choose a shooting mode.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [I] in the  
menu, and then choose a shooting mode  
(=23).  
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group, and  
only the first image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that the  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
image is part of a group, [  
] is displayed in the upper left of the screen.  
If you erase a grouped image (=101), all images in the group are  
also erased. Be careful when erasing images.  
Grouped images can be played back individually (=94) and ungro
(=94).  
Protecting (=98) a grouped image will protect all images in the oup.  
Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back ug Image  
Search (=93) or Smart Shuffle (=97). In this case, images are  
temporarily ungrouped.  
The following actions are not available for grouped images: editing Face  
ID information (=95), magnifying (=96), rotating (=104), tagging  
as favorites (=105), editing (=106 110), printing (=163), adding  
to the print list (=167), or adding to a photobook (=169). To do these  
things, either view grouped images individually (=94) or cancel grouping  
(=94) first.  
3 Shoot.  
Still Images  
Movies  
IShoot portraits (Portrait)  
zzTake shots of people with a softening  
effect.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
       
Before Use  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shoot evening scenes without  
using a tripod (Handheld  
NightScene)  
tShoot fireworks (Fireworks)  
zzVivid shots of fireworks.  
zzBeautiful shots of evening scenes or  
portraits with evening scenery in the  
background, without the need to hold the  
camera very still (as with a tripod).  
zzA single image is created by combining  
consecutive shots, reducing camera  
shake and image noise.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Subjects apper larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.  
In [ ] mode, ots may look grainy because the ISO speed  
(=71) ncrsed to suit the shooting conditions.  
Beause thera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it  
while shting.  
mode, exsive motion blur or certain shooting conditions  
event you frm obtaining the desired results.  
It] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures  
to ep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should  
set [Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure  
the camera (=82).  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Still Images  
Shoot under low light (Low Light)  
zzShoot with minimal camera and subject  
shake even in low-light conditions.  
When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [  
] mode will give better results (=28).  
] mode instead of  
[
Still Images  
vies  
[ ] mode resolution is [ ] (2304 x 1728) and cannot be changed.  
In [t] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press the shutter  
button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.  
PShoot with snowy backgrnd
(Snow)  
zzBright, natural-colored shots of people  
against snowy backgrounds.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
           
Before Use  
Image Effects (Creative Filters)  
Still Images  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shoot in vivid colors (Super  
Vivid)  
zzShots in rich, vivid colors.  
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.  
1 Enter [ ] mode.  
zzSet the mode dial to [ ].  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Still Images  
Movies  
2 Choose a shooting mode.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and then choose a shooting  
mode (=23).  
P Mode  
Posterized shots (Poster Effect)  
zzShots that resemble an old poster or  
illustration.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
In ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make sure  
you tain the desired results.  
3 Shoot.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
       
Before Use  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Shots Resembling Miniature Models  
(Miniature Effect)  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect  
(Fish-Eye Effect)  
Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.  
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and  
below your selected area.  
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by  
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and  
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is  
not recorded.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Choose [ ].  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects  
(Creative Filters)” (=57) and choose  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
[
].  
P Mode  
2 Choose an effect level.  
zzPress the <l> button, choose an  
effect level (either press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <5> dial), and then  
press the <l> button again.  
1 Choose [ ].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects  
(Creative Filters)” (=57) and choose  
[
].  
zzA white frame is displayed, indicating the  
image area that will not be blurred.  
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will  
look with the effect applied.  
2 Choose the area to keep in  
focus.  
zzPress the <l> button.  
zzMove the zoom lever to resize the frame,  
and press the <o><p> buttons to move  
it.  
3 Shoot.  
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain e desired  
results.  
Index  
3 For movies, choose the movie  
playback speed.  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose the speed by pressing the  
<q><r> buttons or turning the <5>  
dial.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
4 Return to the shooting screen  
and shoot.  
zzPress the <n> button to return to the  
shooting screen, and then shoot.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect  
(Toy Camera Effect)  
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting  
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.  
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for One-  
Minute Clips)  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Choose [ ].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Speed  
Playback Time  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects  
(Creative Filters)” (=57) and choose  
Approx. 12 sec.  
P Mode  
[
].  
Approx. 6 sec.  
Approx. 3 sec.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Choose a color tone.  
zzPress the <l> button, choose a color  
tone (either press the <q><r> buttons or  
turn the <5> dial), and then press the  
<l> button again.  
The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set the  
zoom before shooting.  
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired  
results.  
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will  
look with the effect applied.  
To switch the orientation of the frame (from horizontal to verticavice-versa),  
press the <m> button in step 2. You can move the frame in veral orientation  
by pressing the <q><r> buttons.  
Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the fram
Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at an
ratio of [ ] (=46). These quality settings cannot be changed.  
The zoom factor cannot be changed with the < > button on the screens in  
steps 2 and 3, or while shooting movies.  
3 Shoot.  
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.  
Warm  
Cool  
Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].  
Index  
Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].  
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired  
results.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect  
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were  
Shooting in Monochrome  
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.  
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.  
1 Choose [ ].  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Choose [ ].  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects  
(Creative Filters)” (=57) and choose  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects  
(Creative Filters)” (=57) and choose  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
[
].  
[
].  
2 Choose a color tone.  
P Mode  
2 Choose an effect level.  
zzPress the <l> button, choose an  
effect level (either press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <5> dial), and then  
press the <l> button again.  
zzPress the <l> button, choose a color  
tone (either press the <q><r> buttons or  
turn the <5> dial), and then press the  
<l> button again.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will  
look with the effect applied.  
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will  
look with the effect applied.  
3 Shoot.  
Black and white shots.  
3 Shoot.  
a  
Blue  
Sepia tone shots.  
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain e desired  
results.  
Blue and white shots.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.  
The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the camera and  
open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Shooting after Face Detection  
(Smart Shutter)  
To change the number of shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing  
[
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (=49) is only available for the final shot.  
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection  
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you  
pressing the shutter button.  
Automatic shooting is not available while you are holding down the <  
>
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Choose [ ].  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(=55) and choose [ ], and then  
press the <l> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [ ], and then press  
the <l> button.  
zzThe camera now enters shooting standby  
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is  
displayed.  
2 Aim the camera at a pson.  
zzEach time the camera detects smile, it  
will shoot after the lamp lights u
zzTo pause smile detection, press the >  
button. Press the <p> button again to  
resume detection.  
Index  
Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera will  
continue shooting each time a smile is detected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
 
Before Use  
Still Images  
4 Face the camera and wink.  
zzThe camera will shoot about two seconds  
after detecting a wink by the person  
whose face is inside the frame.  
zzTo cancel shooting after you have  
triggered the self-timer, press the  
<n> button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Using the Wink Self-Timer  
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way down.  
The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.  
1 Choose [ ].  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(=55) and choose [ ], and then  
press the <l> button.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [ ], and then press  
the <l> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.  
Winking may ne detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat, or glasses.  
Closing d opeg both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink.  
If winking it ected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.  
nge the er of shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
ep 1. [BliDetection] (=49) is only available for the final shot.  
2 Compose the shot and press  
the shutter button halfway.  
zzMake sure a green frame is displayed  
around the face of the person who will  
wink.  
is in the shing area when the shutter button is pressed all the way  
he camera will shoot after a person enters the shooting area and winks.  
Tzoom factor cannot be changed with the < > button after you press the  
shur button all the way down.  
3 Press the shutter buttall the  
way down.  
zzThe camera now enters shootistandb
mode, and [Wink to take picture]
displayed.  
Index  
zzThe lamp blinks and the self-timer sound  
is played.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
 
Before Use  
Still Images  
4 Join the subjects in the  
shooting area and look at the  
camera.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Using the Face Self-Timer  
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of  
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area  
(=76). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar  
shots.  
zzAfter the camera detects a new face, the  
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will  
speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp  
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,  
the camera will shoot.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Choose [ ].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzTo cancel shooting after you have  
triggered the self-timer, press the  
<n> button.  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(=55) and choose [ ], and then  
press the <l> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [ ], and then press  
the <l> button.  
your face ot detected after you join the others in the shooting area,  
ra will shobout 15 seconds later.  
e the numbf shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing  
n step 1. [Blink Detection] (=49) is only available for the final shot.  
2 Compose the shot and press  
the shutter button halfway.  
zzMake sure a green frame is disd  
around the face you focus on nd white  
frames around other faces.  
Thoom factor cannot be changed with the < > button after you press the  
shubutton all the way down.  
3 Press the shutter buttoall the  
way down.  
Index  
zzThe camera now enters shooting standby  
mode, and [Look straight at camera to  
start count down] is displayed.  
zzThe lamp blinks and the self-timer sound  
is played.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
   
Before Use  
Still Images  
HQ: High Quality  
Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first shot.  
The screen is blank while you are shooting.  
There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can shoot again.  
Note that some types of memory cards may delay your next shot even longer.  
SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended.  
Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings,  
and the zoom position.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
High-Speed Continuous Shooting  
(High-Speed Burst HQ)  
You can shoot a series of shots in rapid succession by holding the shutter  
button all the way down. For details on the continuous shooting speed, see  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Choose [ ].  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(=55) and choose [ ].  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Shoot.  
zzHold the shutter button all the way down  
to shoot continuously.  
zzShooting stops when you relee th
shutter button or reach the mximum  
number of shots, after which usy] is  
displayed and the shots are shn in the  
order you took them.  
Index  
zzEach set of images shot continuously is  
managed as a single group, and only the  
first image in that group will be displayed  
(=55).  
The drive mode is [W] in  
changed.  
Auto mode (=35) and cannot be  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64  
   
Before Use  
Movies  
Movies  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting Various Movies  
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting  
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure or change it in 1/3-stop  
increments within a range of –2 to +2.  
Shooting Movies in [E] Mode  
1 Lock the exposure.  
zzPress the <o> button to lock the  
exposure. The exposure shift bar is  
displayed.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Enter [E] mode.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzSet the mode dial to [E].  
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and  
bottom edges of the screen, and the  
subject is slightly enlarged. The black  
bars indicate image areas not recorded.  
P Mode  
zzTo unlock the exposure, press the <o>  
button again.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Adjust the exposure.  
zzTurn the <5> dial to adjust the  
exposure, as you watch the screen.  
2 Configure the settings to suit  
the movie (=180 183).  
3 Shoot (=65).  
3 Shoot.  
zzPress the movie button.  
zzTo stop movie recording, prethe movie  
button again.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
         
Before Use  
Movies  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting iFrame Movies  
Shoot movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or  
devices. You can quickly edit, save, and manage your iFrame movies using  
the software (=160).  
Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies  
You can shoot fast-moving subjects for playback later in slow motion. Note  
that sound is not recorded.  
1 Choose [ ].  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzSet the mode dial to [E].  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [E]  
1 Choose [ ].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzSet the mode dial to <E>.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [E]  
in the menu, and then choose [  
(=23).  
]
P Mode  
in the menu, and then choose [  
]
(=23).  
2 Choose a frame rate.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzBlack bars displayed on the top and  
bottom edges of the screen indicate  
image areas not recorded.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [  
]
in the menu, and choose the desired  
frame rate (=23).  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
2 Shoot (=65).  
The resolution is [  
] (=48) and cannot be changed.  
iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.  
3 Shoot (=65).  
zzA bar showing the elapsed time is  
displayed. Maximum clip length is approx.  
30 sec.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66  
     
Before Use  
Playback Time  
(For a 30-sec. Clip)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Frame Rate  
Image Quality  
240 fps  
120 fps  
(320 x 240)  
(640 x 480)  
Approx. 4 min.  
Approx. 2 min.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Zooming is not available during recording, even if you move the  
zoom lever.  
Focus, exposure, and color are determined when you press the  
movie button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
When you play the movie (=89), it will be played back in slow motion.  
You can change the playback speed of movies by using the software  
(=160).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
   
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
P Mode  
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set to  
[G] mode.  
[G]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure  
Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than [G
make sure the function is available in that mode (=180 183
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ............... 69 ShootinRange and Fo..................... 74 Other Settings .................................................. 82  
Shootinlose-Ups (Macro).................................74  
Shooting Manual cus Mode...........................74  
Digital Telenver............................................75  
Changing the AF Frame Mode..............................76  
Changing the Focus Setting..................................78  
Shooting with the AF Lock.....................................79  
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps  
the Subject in Focus..............................................79  
Flash.................................................................. 80  
Changing the Flash Mode.....................................80  
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation .......81  
Shooting with the FE Lock ....................................81  
Changing the Compression Ratio  
(Image Quality)......................................................82  
Changing the IS Mode Settings ............................82  
Image Brightness (Exposure) ......................... 69  
Adjusting Image Brightness  
(Exposure Compensation) ....................................69  
Locking Image Brightness /  
Exposure (AE Lock) ..............................................70  
Changing the Metering Method.............................70  
Changing the ISO Speed ......................................71  
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)..............71  
Image Colors .................................................... 72  
Adjusting White Balance .......................................72  
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)............73  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68  
   
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Image Brightness (Exposure)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)  
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting  
style.  
Still Images  
Adjusting Image Brightness  
(Exposure Compensation)  
Movies  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Enter [G] mode.  
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop  
increments, in a range of –2 to +2.  
zzSet the mode dial to [G].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
desired (=69 83), and  
zzPress the <o> button. As you watch  
the screen, turn the <5> dial to adjust  
brightness, and then press the <o>  
button again when finished.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the shutter button  
halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. In this  
case, try adjusting the ISO speed (=71) or activating the flash (if subjects  
are dark, =80), which may enable adequate exposure.  
Movies can be recorded in [G] mode as well, by pressing the movie button.  
However, some FUNC. (=23) and MENU (=24) settings may
automatically adjusted for movie recording.  
zzThe correction level you specified is now  
displayed.  
For details on the shooting range in [G] mode, see “Shooting Re”  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure  
(AE Lock)  
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and  
exposure separately.  
Changing the Metering Method  
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting  
conditions as follows.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=23).  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
1 Lock the exposure.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzAim the camera at the subject to shoot  
with the exposure locked. With the  
shutter button pressed halfway, press the  
<o> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zz[ ] is displayed, and the exposure is  
locked.  
For tyal shooting conditions, including backlit shots.  
Automally adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions.  
zzTo unlock AE, release the shutter button  
and press the <o> button again. In this  
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.  
Determines the average brightness of light across the entire  
image area, calculated by treating brightness in the central area  
as more important.  
Cen
Weigd Avg.  
2 Compose the shot and ho.  
zzAfter one shot, AE is unlockeand [ ] is  
no longer displayed.  
Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point frame),  
pot  
displayed in the center of the screen.  
AE: Auto Exposure  
After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination of shutter speed  
and aperture value by turning the <5> dial (Program Shift).  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70  
       
Before Use  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Changing the ISO Speed  
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)  
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or  
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal  
brightness. Insufficient overall image contrast can also be automatically  
corrected before shooting to make subjects stand out better.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=23).  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[i-Contrast] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose [Auto] (=24).  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [@] is  
displayed.  
P Mode  
Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the shooting mode and  
conditions.  
AUTO  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
100, 200  
400, 800  
Low For shooting outdoors in fair weather.  
For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at twilight.  
For shooting night scenes, or in dark rooms.  
High  
1600, 3200  
er some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or  
mcause images to appear grainy.  
To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have set the ISO  
speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.  
Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image grainiss,  
there may be a greater risk of subject and camera shake in somhooting  
conditions.  
You can also correct existing images (=109).  
Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which mreduce  
subject and camera shake and increase the flash range. However, sh
look grainy.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Image Colors  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Custom White Balance  
Still Images  
Movies  
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white  
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white  
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.  
Adjusting White Balance  
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more  
natural for the scene you are shooting.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzAim the camera at a plain white subject,  
so that the entire screen is white. Press  
the <l> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=23).  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzThe tint of the screen changes once the  
white balance data has been recorded.  
rs may look unnatural if you change camera settings after  
reding white balance data.  
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the shooting  
conditions.  
Auto  
Day Light  
Cloudy  
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.  
For shooting in cloudy conditions, in the shade, t twilight.  
For shooting under ordinary incandescent (tungstlighting  
and similarly colored fluorescent lighting.  
Tungsten  
For shooting under warm-white (or similarly colored) o
white fluorescent lighting.  
Index  
Fluorescent  
For shooting under daylight fluorescent and similarly colored  
fluorescent lighting.  
Fluorescent H  
Custom  
For manually setting a custom white balance (=72).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and other  
qualities as desired (=73).  
Custom Color  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)  
White balance (=72) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.  
With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone may  
change. These settings may not produce the expected results with  
some skin tones.  
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia  
or black and white.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=23).  
Still Images  
Movies  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Custom Color  
P Mode  
Choose the desred ll of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,  
red, green, blue, d n tones in a range of 1 – 5.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
1 Access the setting screen.  
choose [ ], and then press the <l>  
button.  
My Colors Off  
Vivid  
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation, making images  
sharper.  
Neutral  
Sepia  
B/W  
Tones down contrast and color saturation for subdued images
Creates sepia tone images.  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
an option, and then specify the value by  
pressing the <q><r> buttons or turning  
the <5> dial.  
zzFor stronger/more intense effects (or  
darker skin tones), adjust the value to  
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects  
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to  
the left.  
Creates black and white images.  
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, Vivid  
Red to produce intense yet natural-looking colors rmbling  
images on positive film.  
Positive Film  
Index  
Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.  
Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.  
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky, ocean, and other  
Vivid Blue  
blue subjects more vivid.  
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains, foliage, and  
other green subjects more vivid.  
Vivid Green  
Vivid Red  
zzPress the <l> button to complete the  
setting.  
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red subjects more vivid.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Shooting Range and Focusing  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode  
Still Images  
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can  
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button halfway  
to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the position  
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)  
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [e]. For  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <q> button, choose [e] (either  
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
1 Choose [f].  
P Mode  
zzPress the <q> button, choose [f]  
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn  
the <5> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [e] is  
displayed.  
zz[f] and the MF indicator are displayed.  
If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.  
In the yellow bar display area below the zoom bar, [e] will turn gray  
and the camera will not focus.  
2 Specify the general focal  
position.  
zzReferring to the on-screen MF indicator  
bar (which shows the distance and focal  
position) and the magnified display area,  
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to specify the general focal  
To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod shooting  
with the camera set to [[] (=37).  
Index  
MF Indicator  
position, and then press the <m> button.  
zzTo adjust the magnification, press the  
<r> button.  
3 Fine-tune the focus.  
zzPress the shutter button halfway to have  
the camera fine-tune the focal position  
(Safety MF).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74  
       
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
When you focus manually, the AF frame mode (=76) is [Center]  
and AF frame size (=76) is [Normal], and these settings cannot  
be changed.  
Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (=34) or digital  
tele-converter (=75), or when using a TV as a display (=159),  
but the magnified display will not appear.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Digital Tele-Converter  
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or 2.0x.  
This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster than it  
would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the same zoom  
factor.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to stabilize it.  
To hide the magnified display area, choose MENU (=24) > [4] tab > [MF-  
Point Zoom] > [Off].  
To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button is pressed  
halfway, choose MENU (=24) > [4] tab > [Safety MF] > [Off].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Digital Zoom] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose the desired option (=24).  
zzThe view is enlarged and the zoom factor  
is displayed on the screen.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Still Images  
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)  
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing  
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge detection  
as needed.  
digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom  
(=4) or AF-point zoom (=49).  
The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom lever all the  
way toward <i> for maximum telephoto, and when you zoom in to enlarge  
the subject to the same size following step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects  
(Digital Zoom)” (=34).  
1 Access the setting scren.  
zzPress the <n> button, chse [MF  
Peaking Settings] on the [4] taand  
then choose [On] (=24).  
Index  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzChoose a menu item to configure, and  
then choose the desired option (=25).  
Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
       
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Changing the AF Frame Mode  
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as  
follows.  
Face AiAF  
Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative  
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).  
After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed  
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main  
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected  
faces.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [AF  
Frame] on the [4] tab, and then choose  
the desired option (=24).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
When the camera tects movement, frames will follow moving subjects,  
within a certain ran.  
P Mode  
After you prese utter button halfway, up to nine green frames are  
dispround fs in focus.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Still Images  
Movies  
are not deted, or when only gray frames are displayed  
ut a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in the  
ars in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.  
If fas are not detected when Servo AF (=78) is set to [On], the  
AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press  
the shutter button halfway.  
Examples of faces that cannot be detected:  
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close  
- Subjects that are dark or light  
- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden  
Center  
One AF frame is displayed in the center. Effective for reliable focusing.  
A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cnot focus  
when you press the shutter button halfway.  
To reduce the AF frame size, press the <n> button and set [Frame  
Size] on the [4] tab to [Small] (=24).  
Index  
The AF frame size is set to [Normal] when you use the digital zoom (=34)  
or digital tele-converter (=75), and in manual focus mode (=74).  
To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or in a corner,  
first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF frame, and then hold  
the shutter button halfway down. As you continue to hold the shutter button  
halfway, recompose the shot as desired, and then press the shutter button all  
the way down (Focus Lock).  
The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.  
No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you  
press the shutter button halfway.  
The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter button halfway  
and [AF-Point Zoom] (=49) is set to [On].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76  
         
Before Use  
Still Images  
3 Shoot.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the shutter button halfway. [  
]
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)  
changes to a blue [ ], which follows  
the subject as the camera continues to  
adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF)  
(=78).  
zzPress the shutter button all the way down  
to shoot.  
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.  
1 Choose [Tracking AF].  
[Tracking AF].  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzEven after your shot, [ ] is still  
displayed and the camera continues to  
track the subject.  
zz[ ] is displayed in the center of the  
screen.  
P Mode  
2 Choose a subject to focus on.  
zzAim the camera so that [ ] is on the  
desired subject, and then press the <q>  
button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
AF] (=) is set to [On] and cannot be changed.  
g may noe possible when subjects are too small or move  
dly, or whesubject color or brightness matches that of the  
round too closely.  
[APoint Zoom] on the [4] tab is not available.  
[e] not available.  
The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter button halfway  
without pressing the <q> button. After your shot, [ ] is displayed in the  
center of the screen.  
When shooting in [f] mode (=74), press and hold the <q> button for at  
least one second.  
If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered people  
are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still images (=40).  
However, a name will display if the subject chosen to focus on is the same as  
a person detected with Face ID.  
zzWhen the subject is detectehe camera  
beeps and [ ] is displayed. en if the  
subject moves, the camera wilntinue  
to track the subject within a certain
zzIf no subject is detected, [ ] is  
displayed.  
Index  
zzTo cancel tracking, press the <q> button  
again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
   
Before Use  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Changing the Focus Setting  
Shooting with Servo AF  
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the  
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long  
as you press the shutter button halfway.  
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on  
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed. Instead,  
you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button  
halfway.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Servo AF] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose [On] (=24).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Continuous AF] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose [Off] (=24).  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Focus.  
zzThe focus and exposure are maintained  
where the blue AF frame is displayed  
while you are pressing the shutter button  
halfway.  
Havoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because the camera  
conntly focuses on subjects until you press the shutter button halfway.  
Conses battery power, because the camera does not focus constantly.  
Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditi.  
In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (Arames  
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfwIn th
case, the focus and exposure are set according to the specified AF  
frame mode.  
Index  
If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and  
aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter button,  
and then press it halfway again.  
AF lock shooting is not available.  
[AF-Point Zoom] on the [4] tab (=24) is not available.  
Not available when using the self-timer (=37).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps  
the Subject in Focus  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting with the AF Lock  
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will not  
change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.  
Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject in focus. For details  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Lock the focus.  
zzWith the shutter button pressed halfway,  
press the <q> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzThe focus is now locked, and [f] and  
the MF indicator are displayed.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose  
P Mode  
[
] in the menu, and then choose [  
]
(=23).  
zzTo unlock the focus, after you release  
the shutter button, press the <q> button  
again and choose [ ] (either press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is  
displayed.  
2 Shoot.  
2 Compose the shot and shoot.  
zzHold the shutter button all the way down  
to shoot continuously.  
In [t] mode (=56), manual focus mode (=74), or when AF  
is locked (=79), [ ] is changed to [ ].  
Cannot be used with the self-timer (=37).  
Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow  
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the  
zoom position.  
Index  
As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.  
[ ] is not available in  
Auto mode (=35).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
     
Before Use  
Flash  
In [Z] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures  
to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should  
set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure  
the camera (=82).  
In [Z] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main subject  
does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Still Images  
Changing the Flash Mode  
You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details on  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
[!] Off  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Raise the flash.  
For shooting without the flash.  
zzMove the <h> switch.  
P Mode  
If a blinng [ icon is displayed when you press the shutter button  
halfway in a-shake inducing, low-light conditions, mount the  
a on a td or take other measures to keep it still.  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <r> button, choose a flash  
mode (either press the <q><r> buttons  
or turn the <5> dial), and then press the  
<m> button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the r> button  
when the flash is lowered. Move the <h> switch to raise e flash,  
then configure the setting.  
Index  
[
] Auto  
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.  
[h] On  
Fires for each shot.  
[Z] Slow Synchro  
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a  
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
   
Before Use  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation  
Just as with regular exposure compensation (=69), you can adjust the  
flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.  
Shooting with the FE Lock  
Just as with the AE lock (=70), you can lock the exposure for the flash  
shots.  
1 Raise the flash and set it to [h]  
(=80).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [X] in  
the menu, and adjust the setting by either  
pressing the <o><p> buttons or turning  
the <5> dial (=23).  
zzThe correction level you specified is now  
displayed.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Lock the flash exposure.  
zzAim the camera at the subject to shoot  
with the exposure locked. With the  
shutter button pressed halfway, press the  
<o> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzThe flash fires, and when  
When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically adjusts the  
shutter speed or aperture value during the flash shots to reduce washed-  
out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure. However, you can deactivate  
automatic adjustment of the shutter speed and aperture value by accessing  
MENU (=24) and choosing [4] tab > [Flash Settings] > [Safety FE] > [Off].  
You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by acceing NU  
(=24) and choosing [4] tab > [Flash Settings] > [Flash Exp. Cmp].  
You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (=24) en the  
flash is up by pressing the <r> button and immediately pressing <n
button.  
[
] is displayed, the flash output level is  
retained.  
zzTo unlock FE, release the shutter button  
and press the <o> button again. In this  
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.  
3 Compose the shot and shoot.  
zzAfter one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is  
no longer displayed.  
Index  
FE: Flash Exposure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
81  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Other Settings  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Changing the IS Mode Settings  
Still Images  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [IS  
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press  
the <m> button (=24).  
Changing the Compression Ratio  
(Image Quality)  
Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as  
follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can fit  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzChoose [IS Mode], and then choose the  
desired option (=25).  
P Mode  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=23).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Optimal e stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically  
plied (Intent IS) (=33).  
Shoot ge stabilizn is active only at the moment of shooting.  
Conti
f eactivates image stabilization.  
settis changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.  
If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the  
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this  
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
     
Before Use  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown  
before Shooting  
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes  
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant camera  
shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, you can  
choose not to reduce significant camera shake.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
[IS Settings] screen.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzChoose [Dynamic IS], and then choose  
[2] (=24).  
You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded at  
the same size shown before shooting.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
83  
   
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective mode.  
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode).............. 85  
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ............ 85  
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values  
([M] Mode)........................................................ 86  
Adjusting the Flash Output....................................87  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
   
Before Use  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)  
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera  
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.  
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)  
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera  
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Enter [M] mode.  
1 Enter [B] mode.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzSet the mode dial to [M].  
zzSet the mode dial to [B].  
2 Set the shutter speed.  
zzTurn the <5> dial to set the shutter  
speed.  
2 Set the aperture value.  
zzTurn the <5> dial to set the aperture  
value.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
In shooting conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there will  
be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes  
images to reduce noise.  
When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you shoet [IS  
Mode] to [Off] (=82).  
Maximum shutter speed with the flash is 1/2000 seconf you  
specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically resthe speed  
to 1/2000 second before shooting.  
Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutt
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard  
exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is  
displayed in white, or use safety shift (=85).  
display of hutter speeds when you press the shutter button  
hway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure.  
Adst the aperture value until the shutter speed is displayed in  
whitor use safety shift (see below).  
[B]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the lens)  
To avoid exposure problems in [M] and [B] modes, you can have the  
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed or aperture value, even when  
standard exposure cannot otherwise be obtained. Press the <n> button  
and set [Safety Shift] on the [4] tab to [On] (=24).  
Index  
However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.  
[M]: Time value  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
       
Before Use  
Still Images  
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture  
Values ([M] Mode)  
After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure level  
may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.  
Screen brightness may change depending on your specified shutter  
speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness remains the  
same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [h].  
To have the setting you did not configure in step 2 (whether shutter  
speed or aperture value) automatically adjusted to obtain standard  
exposure, hold the shutter button halfway and press the <o>  
button. Note that standard exposure may not be possible with some  
settings.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed and  
aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Enter [D] mode.  
P Mode  
zzSet the mode dial to [D].  
With shter seds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [100]  
and cannanged.  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <o> button, choose  
adjustment of shutter speed or aperture  
value, and turn the <5> dial to specify  
a value.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
ual  
n of standexposure is based on the specified metering method  
zzAn exposure level mark based on your  
specified value is shown on thxure  
level indicator for comparisoo the  
Aperture Value  
standard exposure level.  
Shutter Speed  
zzThe exposure level mark is shn in  
orange when the difference from anda
exposure exceeds 2 stops.  
Exposure  
Standard  
Exposure Level  
Index  
Level Indicator  
Exposure Level  
Mark  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
   
Before Use  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Adjusting the Flash Output  
Choose from the three flash levels in [D] mode.  
1 Enter [D] mode.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzSet the mode dial to [D].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [X] in  
the menu, and adjust the setting by either  
pressing the <o><p> buttons or turning  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
5
the < > dial (=23).  
zzOnce the setting is complete, the flash  
output level is displayed.  
[
]: low, [  
]: medium, [  
]: high  
You can also set the flash level by accessing MENU (=24) and choosing  
[4] tab > [Flash Settings] > [Flash Output].  
You can set the flash level in [M] or [B] mode by accessing NU  
(=24) and choosing [4] tab > [Flash Settings] > [Flash Mode] Manual].  
You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen when thsh is up b
pressing the <r> button and immediately pressing the <n> bon.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
 
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Playback Mode  
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
To prepare the camera for these operations, press the <1> button to enter Playback mode.  
It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were renamed or already edited on a comter, or images from other cameras.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Viewing.............................................................. 89 Protecting Images................... 98 Editing Still Images........................................ 106  
Switching Display Modes ......................................90  
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting  
Still Images (Digest Movies)..................................91  
Checking People Detected in Face ID ..................92  
Using the Menu.......................99  
ChoosinmaInd....................99  
Selectia Range..........................100  
Specifyg All Images at O......................101  
Resizing Images..................................................106  
Cropping..............................................................107  
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)..........108  
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)............109  
Correcting Red-Eye.............................................109  
Browsing and Filtering Images....................... 93 Erasing ages........................................... 101  
Editing Movies................................................ 110  
Reducing File Sizes ............................................ 112  
Editing Digest Movies.......................................... 112  
Navigating through Images in an Index.................93  
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions ....93  
Viewing Individual Images in a Group...................94  
Erasing Mple Ims at Once ........................102  
Rotating Imag......................................... 104  
Using the Menu...................................................104  
Deactivating Auto Rotation..................................105  
Index  
Editing Face ID Information ............................ 95  
Image Viewing Options.................................... 96 Tagging Images as Favorites........................ 105  
Magnifying Images................................................96  
Viewing Slideshows ..............................................96  
Auto Playback of Related Images  
(Smart Shuffle)......................................................97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
   
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
zzMovies are identified by a [  
] icon. To  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Viewing  
play movies, go to step 3.  
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as  
follows.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Enter Playback mode.  
zzPress the <1> button.  
zzYour last shot is displayed.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
3 Play movies.  
zzTo start playback, press the <m> button,  
choose [ ] (either press the <o><p>  
buttons or turn the <5> dial), and then  
press the <m> button again.  
P Mode  
2 Browse through your images.  
zzTo view the previous image, press  
the <q> button or turn the <5> dial  
counterclockwise. To view the next  
image, press the <r> button or turn the  
<5> dial clockwise.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
4 Adjust the volume.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to adjust the  
volume.  
zzPress and hold the <q><r> bto  
browse through images quic.  
zzTo adjust the volume when the volume  
indicator is no longer displayed, press the  
<o><p> buttons.  
Volume Indicator  
Index  
zzTo access Scroll Display mode, turn the  
5 Pause playback.  
zzTo pause or resume playback, press the  
<m> button.  
5
5
<
<
> dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the  
> dial to browse through images.  
zzTo return to single-image display, press  
m
zzAfter the movie is finished, [  
displayed.  
] is  
the < > button.  
zzTo browse images grouped by shooting  
date, press the <o><p> buttons in  
Scroll Display mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button  
halfway.  
To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (=24) > [1] tab > [Scroll  
Display] > [Off].  
To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback mode,  
choose MENU (=24) > [1] tab > [Resume] > [Last shot].  
To change the transition shown between images, access MENU (=24) and  
choose your desired effect in [1] tab > [Transition Effect].  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)  
Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed  
information display (=90).  
Still Images  
Movies  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Histogram  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
High  
zzThe graph in detailed information display  
(=90) is a histogram showing the  
distribution of brightness in the image.  
The horizontal axis represents the degree  
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how  
much of the image is at each level of  
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a  
way to check exposure.  
Still Images  
Movies  
P Mode  
Switching Display Modes  
Press the <l> button to view other information on the screen, or to hide  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Da
right  
No Information  
Display  
Simple  
Information  
Display  
Detailed  
Information  
Display  
GInformation  
Display  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90  
         
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Viewing Short Movies Created When  
Shooting Still Images (Digest Movies)  
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (=30) on a day  
of still image shooting as follows.  
GPS Information Display  
zzUsing a smartphone connected to the  
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images  
on the camera, adding information such  
as latitude, longitude, and elevation  
(=141). You can review this information  
in the GPS information display.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Choose an image.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzStill images shot in [ ] mode are labeled  
zzLatitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC  
(shooting date and time) are listed from  
top to bottom.  
with an [  
] icon.  
GPS Display  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
GPS information display is not available for images that lack this  
information.  
[---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available on  
your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.  
2 Play the movie.  
zzPress the <m> button, and then choose  
[
] in the menu (=23).  
UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as Greenan  
zzThe movie recorded automatically on the  
day of still image shooting is played back,  
from the beginning.  
Time  
After a moment, [  
] will no longer be displayed when you are using the  
Index  
camera with information display deactivated (=90).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
   
Before Use  
Still Images  
Viewing by Date  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Checking People Detected in Face ID  
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (=90), the  
names of up to five detected people registered in Face ID (=40) will be  
displayed.  
Digest movies can be viewed by date.  
1 Choose a movie.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [List/  
Play Digest Movies] on the [1] tab, and  
then choose a date (=24).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the <l> button several  
times until simple information display is  
activated, and then press the <q><r>  
buttons to choose an image.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Play the movie.  
zzPress the <m> button to start playback.  
P Mode  
zzNames will be displayed on detected  
people.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
fer not to hanames displayed on images shot using Face ID,  
se MENU (=24) > [1] tab > [Face ID Info] > [Name Display] > [Off].  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Browsing and Filtering Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions  
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering  
image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect  
(=98) or delete (=101) these images all at once.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Navigating through Images in an Index  
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
you are looking for.  
Name  
Displays images of a registered person (=40).  
Displays images with detected faces.  
People  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Display images in an index.  
zzMove the zoom lever toward <g> to  
display images in an index. Moving the  
lever again will increase the number of  
images shown.  
Shot Date  
Favorites  
Displays the images shot on a specific date.  
P Mode  
Displays images tagged as favorites (=105).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Displays only still images or movies.  
Movie  
[
] mode (=30).  
zzTo display fewer images, move the zoom  
lever toward <k>. Fewer images are  
shown each time you move the lever.  
1 Choose a search condition.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in the  
zzWhen you have selected [ ], [ ], or  
2 Choose an image.  
zzTurn the <5> dial to scroll tugh he  
images.  
[
], choose the condition by pressing  
the <o><p><q><r> buttons on the  
screen displayed, and then press the  
<m> button.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> ttons to  
choose an image.  
Index  
zzAn orange frame is displayed arou
selected image.  
2 View the filtered images.  
zzImages matching your conditions are  
displayed in yellow frames. To view only  
these images, press the <q><r> buttons.  
zzTo cancel filtered display, choose [ ] in  
step 1.  
zzPress the <m> button to view the  
selected image in single-image display.  
To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the <o><p>  
buttons or turn the <5> dial rapidly), choose MENU (=24) > [1] tab >  
[Index Effect] > [Off].  
When the camera has found no corresponding images for some  
conditions, those conditions will not be available.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
         
Before Use  
3 View images in the group  
individually.  
zzPressing the <q><r> buttons or turning  
the <5> dial will display only images in  
the group.  
To show or hide information, press the <l> button in step 2.  
Slideshows” (=96). You can protect, erase, or print all images found or add  
them to a photobook by choosing [Select All Images in Search] in “Protecting  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzTo cancel group playback, press the  
<m> button, choose [ ] in the menu,  
and press the <m> button again  
(=23).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
If you edit images and save them as new images (=106 112), a message  
is displayed, and the images that were found are no longer shown.  
P Mode  
During p plack (step 3), you can browse through images quickly  
Tgroup images so that they are displayed only as single still images,  
choe MENU (=24) > [1] tab > [Group Images] > [Off] (=24).  
Still Images  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Viewing Individual Images in a Group  
Images shot in [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode (=54, 53, 64) are grouped  
for display, and these grouped images can be viewed one at a time.  
1 Choose a grouped image
zzPress the <q><r> buttons ourn the  
<5> dial to choose an imagabeled  
Simultaneous display in [  
immediately after you shoot.  
with [  
].  
Index  
2 Choose [ ].  
zzPress the <m> button, and then choose  
[
] in the menu (=23).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
   
Before Use  
Editing Face ID Information  
3 Choose the editing option.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <5> dial to choose [Overwrite],  
and then press the <m> button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it or  
erase it.  
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face  
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been  
erased.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
4 Choose the name of the person  
to overwrite with.  
zzFollow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding  
Face Information” (=44) to choose  
the name of the person you want to  
overwrite with.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Changing Names  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button and choose  
[Face ID Info] on the [1] tab (=24).  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and  
then press the <m> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
EraNames  
zzFollowing step 3 in “Changing Names”  
(=95), choose [Erase] and press the  
<m> button.  
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial to  
choose [OK], and then press the <m>  
button.  
2 Choose an image.  
choose an image and press <  
button.  
>
m
zzAn orange frame is displayed ard th
selected face. When multiple names are  
displayed in an image, press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <5> dial to choose  
the name to change, and then press the  
<m> button.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
95  
         
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Image Viewing Options  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Viewing Slideshows  
Still Images  
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows. Each  
image is displayed for about three seconds.  
Magnifying Images  
1 Magnify an image.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [.] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=23).  
zzThe slideshow will start after [Loading  
image] is displayed for a few seconds.  
zzPress the <n> button to stop the  
slideshow.  
zzMoving the zoom lever toward <k> will  
zoom in and magnify the image. You  
can magnify images up to about 10x by  
continuing to hold the zoom lever.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
zzTo zoom out, move the zoom lever  
toward <g>. You can return to single-  
image display by continuing to hold it.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
mera’s pow-saving functions (=21) are deactivated  
2 Move the display position and  
switch images as needed.  
zzTo move the display position, press the  
<o><p><q><r> buttons.  
zzTo switch to other images whzoomed,  
turn the <5> dial.  
slideshows.  
To pse or resume slideshows, press the <m> button.  
You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the <q><r>  
buttons or turning the <5> dial. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the  
<q><r> buttons down.  
In image search mode (=93), only images matching search conditions are  
played.  
Approximate Position of  
Displayed Area  
You can return to single-image display from magnified display by psing the  
<n> button.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Changing Slideshow Settings  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Playback of Related Images  
You can set up slideshows to repeat, and you can change the transitions  
between images and the display duration of each image.  
(Smart Shuffle)  
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may  
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera  
offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in  
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in  
many kinds of scenes.  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Slideshow] on the [1] tab  
(=24).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Configure the settings.  
zzChoose a menu item to configure, and  
then choose the desired option (=25).  
zzTo start the slideshow with your settings,  
choose [Start] and press the <m>  
button.  
P Mode  
1 Choose Smart Shuffle.  
zzPress the <m> button, and then choose  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
[
] in the menu (=23).  
zzFour candidate images are displayed.  
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the  
<n> button.  
2 Choose an image.  
[Play Time] cannot be modified when [Bubble] is chosen [Effect].  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to  
choose the image you want to view next.  
zzYour chosen image is displayed in the  
center, surrounded by the next four  
candidate images.  
Index  
zzFor full-screen display of the center  
image, press the <m> button. To restore  
the original display, press the <m>  
button again.  
zzPress the <n> button to restore  
single-image display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
   
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Only still images shot with this camera are played back using Smart  
Shuffle.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Protecting Images  
Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases:  
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera  
- An unsupported image is currently displayed  
- Images are shown in filtered display (=93)  
- During group playback (=94)  
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera  
(=101).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the <m> button, and then choose  
[:] in the menu (=23). [Protected]  
is displayed.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzTo cancel protection, repeat this process  
and choose [:] again, and then press  
the <m> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
d imagen a memory card will be erased if you format the  
=149, 150)
Prcted images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure function. To  
erasem this way, first cancel protection.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98  
   
Before Use  
Using the Menu  
Choosing Images Individually  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1 Choose [Select].  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button and choose  
[Protect] on the [1] tab (=24).  
zzFollowing step 2 in “Using the Menu”  
(=99), choose [Select] and press the  
<m> button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
2 Choose an image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.  
zzTo cancel selection, press the <m>  
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.  
zzRepeat this process to specify other  
images.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Choose a selection method.  
zzChoose a menu item and an option as  
desired (=25).  
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the  
<n> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
3 Protect the image.  
zzPress the <n> button. A  
confirmation message is displayed.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Index  
Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn  
the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
   
Before Use  
Selecting a Range  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
zzImages before the first image cannot be  
selected as the last image.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1 Choose [Select Range].  
zzFollowing step 2 in “Using the Menu”  
(=99), choose [Select Range] and  
press the <m> button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
2 Choose a starting image.  
zzPress the <m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
4 Protect the images.  
zzPress the <p> button to choose  
[Protect], and then press the <m>  
button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
Yan also choose the first or last image by turning the <5> dial when the  
top reen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.  
3 Choose an ending imag
zzPress the <r> button to choose [L
image], and then press the <m> button.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
   
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Specifying All Images at Once  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Erasing Images  
1 Choose [Select All Images].  
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when  
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected  
images (=98) cannot be erased.  
zzFollowing step 2 in “Using the Menu”  
(=99), choose [Select All Images] and  
press the <m> button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
2 Protect the images.  
1 Choose an image to erase.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an image.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Protect], and then  
press the <m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
2 Erase the image.  
zzPress the <p> button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial to  
choose [Erase], and then press the <m>  
button.  
To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4 of  
“Selecting a Range” or in step 2 of “Specifying All Images at Once”.  
zzThe current image is now erased.  
zzTo cancel erasure, press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <5> dial to choose  
[Cancel], and then press the <m>  
button.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
   
Before Use  
Erasing Multiple Images at Once  
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when erasing  
images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images  
(=98) cannot be erased.  
Choosing Images Individually  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1 Choose [Select].  
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection  
Method” (=102), choose [Select] and  
press the <m> button.  
Choosing a Selection Method  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
2 Choose an image.  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Erase] on the [1] tab (=24).  
zzOnce you choose an image following  
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”  
(=99), [ ] is displayed.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
zzTo cancel selection, press the <m>  
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.  
zzRepeat this process to specify other  
images.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Choose a selection method.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose a selection method,  
and then press the <m> butt.  
zzTo return to the menu screenpress the  
<n> button.  
3 Erase the image.  
zzPress the <n> button. A  
confirmation message is displayed.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102  
   
Before Use  
Selecting a Range  
Specifying All Images at Once  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1 Choose [Select Range].  
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection  
Method” (=102), choose [Select  
1 Choose [Select All Images].  
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection  
Method” (=102), choose [Select All  
Images] and press the <m> button.  
Range] and press the <m> button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
2 Choose images.  
2 Erase the images.  
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”  
(=100) to specify images.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
3 Erase the images.  
zzPress the <p> button to choose [Erase],  
and then press the <m> button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
103  
 
Before Use  
Still Images  
Using the Menu  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Rotating Images  
1 Choose [Rotate].  
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.  
zzPress the <n> button and choose  
[Rotate] on the [1] tab (=24).  
1 Choose [ ].  
\
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the < > button, and then choose  
m
[
] in the menu (=23).  
\
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
2 Rotate the image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an image.  
zzThe image is rotated 90° each time you  
press the <m> button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Rotate the image.  
zzPress the <q> or <r> button, depending  
on the desired direction. Each time you  
press the button, the image is rotated  
90°. Press the <m> button to complete  
the setting.  
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the  
<n> button.  
Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off] (=105).  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
104  
   
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Deactivating Auto Rotation  
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates  
images based on the current camera orientation.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Tagging Images as Favorites  
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a  
category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to all  
of those images.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Auto  
Rotate] on the [1] tab, and then choose  
[Off] (=24).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
zzPress the <m> button, and then choose  
[
] in the menu (=23).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zz[Tagged as Favorite] is displayed.  
zzTo untag the image, repeat this process  
and choose [ ] again, and then press  
the <m> button.  
Images cannot be rotated (=104) when you set [Auto Rotate] to  
[Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in the  
original orientation.  
In Smart Shuffle (=97) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set to  
[Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and rotated  
images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
     
Before Use  
Editing Still Images  
Using the Menu  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1 Choose [Favorites].  
Image editing (=106 110) is only available when the memory  
card has sufficient free space.  
zzPress the <n> button and choose  
[Favorites] on the [1] tab (=24).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Still Images  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Resizing Images  
Save a copy of imagat a lower resolution.  
2 Choose an image.  
P Mode  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.  
zzTo untag the image, press the <m>  
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.  
zzRepeat this process to choose additional  
images.  
1 Choose [Resize].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzPress the <n> button and choose  
[Resize] on the [1] tab (=24).  
3 Finish the setup proces.  
zzPress the <n> button. A  
confirmation message is displed.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or tuthe  
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then ss  
the <m> button.  
2 Choose an image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
Index  
3 Choose an image size.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose the size, and then  
press the <m> button.  
Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting  
mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in  
step 3.  
zz[Save new image?] is displayed.  
Favorite images will have a three-star rating (  
) when transferred  
to computers running Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista. (Does not  
apply to movies.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
4 Save the new image.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Cropping  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.  
zzThe image is now saved as a new file.  
1 Choose [Cropping].  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Cropping] on the [1] tab  
(=24).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
5 Review the new image.  
zzPress the <n> button. [Display new  
image?] is displayed.  
P Mode  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Yes], and then  
press the <m> button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Choose an image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
zzThe saved image is now displayed.  
]
(=46) or saved as [ ] in step 3.  
Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
       
Before Use  
Still Images  
Cropping Area  
3 Adjust the cropping area.  
zzA frame is displayed around the portion of  
the image to be cropped.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)  
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate file. For  
zzThe original image is shown in the upper  
left, and a preview of the image as  
cropped is shown in the lower right.  
zzTo resize the frame, move the zoom  
lever.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Choose [My Colors].  
zzPress the <n> button, and then choose  
[My Colors] on the [1] tab (=24).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzTo move the frame, press the  
<o><p><q><r> buttons.  
Preview of Image After Cropping  
Resolution After Cropping  
P Mode  
zzTo change the frame orientation, press  
the <l> button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Choose an image.  
zzFaces detected in the image are  
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left  
image. To crop the image based on this  
frame, turn the <5> dial to switch to the  
other frame.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
3 Choose an option.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an option, and then  
press the <m> button.  
zzPress the <m> button.  
4 Save as a new image ad  
review.  
zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Iges”  
(=107).  
Index  
4 Save as a new image and review.  
zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”  
(=107).  
(=46) or resized to [ ] (=106).  
]
Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping.  
Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped images.  
If you crop still images shot using Face ID (=40), only the names of the  
people left in the cropped image will remain.  
Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little  
lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired color.  
The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly from the color  
of images shot using My Colors (=73).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108  
   
Before Use  
Still Images  
For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause  
images to appear grainy.  
Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)  
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be  
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient  
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects  
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the  
image as a separate file.  
If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting images using  
[Low], [Medium], or [High].  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Still Images  
1 Choose [i-Contrast].  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [i-Contrast] on the [1] tab  
(=24).  
Correcting ed-Eye  
P Mode  
Automatically cotages affected by red-eye. You can save the  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
correctge as arate file.  
1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction].  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [1]  
tab (=24).  
2 Choose an image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an imagand en  
press the <m> button.  
3 Choose an option.  
2 Choose an image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or tthe  
<5> dial to choose an option, and
press the <m> button.  
Index  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an image.  
4 Save as a new image and  
review.  
zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”  
(=107).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
     
Before Use  
Movies  
3 Correct the image.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the <m> button.  
Editing Movies  
zzRed-eye detected by the camera is now  
corrected, and frames are displayed  
around corrected image areas.  
zzEnlarge or reduce images as needed.  
You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end.  
1 Choose [*].  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzFollowing steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”  
(=89), choose [*] and press the  
<m> button.  
zzThe movie editing panel and editing bar  
are now displayed.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
4 Save as a new image and  
review.  
P Mode  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <5> dial to choose [New File],  
and then press the <m> button.  
zzThe image is now saved as a new file.  
zzFollow step 5 in “Resizing Images”  
(=107).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Movie nel  
2 Specify portions to cut.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
[
] or [ ].  
zzTo view the portions you can cut  
(identified by [ ] on the screen), press  
the <q><r> buttons or turn the <5>  
dial to move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the  
movie (from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and  
cut the end of the movie by choosing  
Some images may not be corrected accurately.  
To overwrite the original image with the corrected imagchoose  
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image wile erased.  
Protected images cannot be overwritten.  
Movie Editing Bar  
[
].  
zzIf you move [ ] to a position other than a  
] mark, in [ ] the portion before the  
Index  
[
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,  
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest  
[
] mark on the right will be cut.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110  
     
Before Use  
3 Review the edited movie.  
To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite]  
in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased.  
If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be  
available.  
Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving  
is in progress.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
[
], and then press the <m> button.  
The edited movie is now played.  
zzTo edit the movie again, repeat step 2.  
zzTo cancel editing, press the <o><p>  
buttons to choose [ ]. Press the <m>  
button, choose [OK] (either press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial),  
and then press the <m> button again.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack or  
an AC adapter kit (sold separately, =156).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
4 Save the edited movie.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
[
], and then press the <m> button.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <5> dial to choose [New File],  
and then press the <m> button.  
zzThe movie is now saved as a new file.  
zzChoose [Save w/o Comp.], athen  
press the <m> button.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
Before Use  
Movies  
Reducing File Sizes  
Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Editing Digest Movies  
Individual chapters (clips) (=30) recorded in [ ] mode can be erased, as  
needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be recovered.  
zzOn the screen in step 2 of “Editing  
Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],  
and then press the <m> button.  
zzChoose [Compress & Sav.], and then  
press the <m> button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Select the clip to erase.  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short  
Movies Created When Shooting Still  
Images (Digest Movies)” (=91) to  
play a movie created in [ ] mode, and  
then press the <m> button to access the  
movie control panel.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Compressed movies are saved in [  
[ ] movies cannot be compressed.  
] format.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and  
then press the <m> button.  
Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you choose  
[Overwrite].  
However, you can compress and save edited movies as new files by choosing  
[Compress & Sav.].  
2 Choose [ ].  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [ ], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzThe selected clip is played back repeatedly.  
Index  
3 Confirm erasure.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzThe clip is erased, and the short movie is  
overwritten.  
[ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is connected to a  
printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112  
   
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web services  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
What You Can Do with Wi-Fi ......................... 114 Accessing the Wi-F................ 123  
Using the < > Button................................... 137  
Registering a Smartphone to the < > Button ...137  
Uploading Images to Web Services.................... 114  
Sending Images to a Smartphone....................... 115  
Sending Images to a Computer .......................... 115  
Printing Images Wirelessly.................................. 116  
Sending Images to Another Camera................... 116  
Registering Web Services............................. 116  
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ............. 117  
Registering Other Web Services......................... 119  
Initial Connection via ..............123  
After the itiai-Fi ..................123  
Connecg via an Acc................. 124  
Confirmg Access Point Cotibility................124 Sending Images Automatically  
Connectto WPSompatible Access  
Points .........................................................125  
Connecting ts Points in the List ..............128  
Connecting without an Access Point........... 129  
Previous Access Points.......................................132  
Connecting to Another Camera.................... 132  
Registering Image Sync to the < > Button.......138  
Clearing Registered Destinations........................139  
(Image Sync) ................................................. 139  
Initial Preparations ..............................................139  
Sending Images ..................................................140  
Geotagging Images on the Camera.............. 141  
Shooting Remotely ........................................ 141  
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings ................. 142  
Editing Connection Information...........................142  
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default...............144  
Index  
Installing CameraWindow  
on a Smartphone .......................................... 119  
Preparing to Register a Computer................ 120  
Sending Images.............................................. 133  
Checking Your Computer Environment...............120  
Installing the Software.........................................121  
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi  
Sending Images Individually ...............................133  
Sending Multiple Images.....................................135  
Adding Comments...............................................136  
Connection (Windows Only)................................122  
Saving Images to a Computer....................... 136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
   
Before Use  
Uploading Images to Web Services  
What You Can Do with Wi-Fi  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
This camera is an approved Wi-Fi® product. You can wirelessly connect to  
and send images to the following devices and services.  
Note that, in this chapter, wireless LAN functions other than Wi-Fi may be  
referred to as Wi-Fi.  
Images can be sent to social network services and other Web services  
via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY*. Unsent images on the camera can also  
be sent automatically to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY.  
Sending images via Wi-Fi requires some initial preparation on the camera  
and target devices. Preparations and methods of sending images vary  
depending on the destination.  
Note that before using Wi-Fi (=123), you will need to register a camera  
nickname on the camera.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
* CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is an online photo service available to those who have  
purchased this product.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Steps in sending images  
P Mode  
S, v-  
CANON iMAGE  
shs,  
GATEWAY  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
e-
Wi-Fi is a brand name that indicates interoperability certification of wireless  
LAN devices.  
Access point  
Camera  
Computer or smartphone  
browsers  
gister Web services (=116)  
Connect via an access point (=124)  
Send images (=133)*  
* You can send images to a computer or Web service.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
 
Before Use  
Sending Images to a Smartphone  
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi  
functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a  
smartphone or tablet.  
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other compatible  
devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.  
Sending Images to a Computer  
Use the software to wirelessly send images from the camera to a computer.  
Steps in sending images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Internet  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
CameraWindow  
Steps in sending images  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Access point  
App Store/Google Play  
CameraWindow  
Cama  
Computer  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Ccomputenvironment (=120)  
Dod install tsoftware (=121)  
Conhe computer for a Wi-Fi connection (Windows only, =122)  
onnvia an access point (=124)  
Camera  
Smartphone  
Tablet computer  
Access point  
e imes to the computer (=136)  
Install CameraWindow on a smartphone (=119)  
Connect directly (=129) or via an access point (=124)  
Send images (=133)  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
   
Before Use  
Printing Images Wirelessly  
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting DPS  
over IP) to print them.  
Registering Web Services  
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that you  
want to use.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is  
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and  
other Web services.  
Steps in sending images  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser  
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and  
version informatio
Camera  
Printer  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Access point  
P Mode  
For informatn on untries and regions where CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY is ae, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/  
cig/
Connect directly (=129) or via an access point (=124)  
Print images (=163)  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Yoe an accnt with Web services other than CANON iMAGE  
GATyou desire o use them. For further details, check the  
ebsifor each Web service you want to register.  
Sending Images to Another Camera  
Use the Wi-Fi function to send images between Canon-brand cams.  
aratSP connection and access point fees may be applicable.  
Steps in sending images  
Index  
Camera  
Camera  
Connect to another camera (=132)  
Send images (=133)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
   
Before Use  
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY  
After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.  
3 Access the Wi-Fi menu.  
zzOn the camera, access the Wi-Fi menu  
(=123).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
4 Choose [ ].  
1 Log in to CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY and access the  
camera settings page.  
zzFrom a computer or smartphone, access  
http://www.canon.com/cig/ and visit the  
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY site for your  
region.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
turn the <5> dial to choose [  
then press the <m> button.  
], and  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
5 Establish a connection with an  
access point.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Authenticate], and  
then press the <m> button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzOnce the login screen is displayed,  
enter your user name and password  
to log in. If you do not have a CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow  
the instructions to complete member  
registration (free of charge).  
zzAccess the camera settings ge.  
6 Choose an access point.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose a network (access  
point), and then press the <m> button.  
2 Choose your camera mdel.  
zzOn this camera model, [  
] is splayed  
in the Wi-Fi menu.  
Index  
zzOnce you choose the model, a page is  
displayed for entering the authentication  
code. On this page in step 9, you will  
enter the authentication code displayed  
on the camera after steps 3 – 8.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
 
Before Use  
7 Enter the access point  
password.  
zzPress the <m> button to access the  
keyboard, and then enter the password  
(=124).  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Next], and then  
press the <m> button.  
10 Check the confirmation  
numbers and complete the  
setup process.  
zzMake sure the confirmation number on  
the camera matches the number on the  
smartphone or computer.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
8 Choose [Auto] and establish the  
connection.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Auto], and then  
press the <m> button.  
P Mode  
zzComplete the setup process on the  
smartphone or computer.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zz[ ] (=139) and CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY are now added as  
zzOnce the camera is connected to CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY via the accs nt,  
an authentication code is disayed.  
destinations, and the [  
to [ ].  
] icon changes  
zzA message is displayed on the  
smartphone or computer to indicate that  
this process is finished. To add other  
Web services, follow the procedure in  
“Registering Other Web Services” from  
step 2 (=119).  
Index  
9 Enter the authentication code.  
zzOn the smartphone or computer, enter  
the authentication code displayed on the  
camera and go to the next step.  
zzA six-digit confirmation number is  
displayed.  
You can connect to WPS-compatible access points by choosing [WPS  
Connection] in step 6. For details, see steps 5 – 7 in “Connecting to WPS-  
Compatible Access Points” (=125 126).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
Before Use  
Registering Other Web Services  
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the  
camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the  
camera first (=117).  
Installing CameraWindow on a  
Smartphone  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Before connecting your camera to a smartphone, first install the free  
dedicated application, CameraWindow, on your smartphone.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Access the Web service  
settings screen.  
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then  
access the Web service settings screen.  
1 Connect the smartphone to a  
network.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Install CameraWindow.  
zzFor an NFC-compatible Android  
smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later),  
activating NFC and touching the  
smartphone against the camera’s  
N-Mark ( ) will start Google Play on the  
smartphone. Once the CameraWindow  
download page is displayed, download  
and install the app.  
2 Configure the Web service you  
want to use.  
zzFollow the instructions displayed on the  
smartphone or computer to set up the  
Web service.  
3 Choose [ ].  
zzAccess the Wi-Fi menu (=1), choose  
[
] (either press the <o><<q><r>  
zzFor other Android smartphones, find  
CameraWindow in Google Play and  
download and install the app.  
buttons or turn the <5> dial), d then  
press the <m> button.  
Index  
zzThe Web service settings are now  
updated.  
zzFor an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, find  
CameraWindow in the App Store and  
download and install the app.  
If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to update the  
camera settings.  
zzAfter installation, use the camera  
to establish a connection with the  
smartphone (=124, 129).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
           
Before Use  
Preparing to Register a Computer  
Prepare to register a computer. To save images to the computer wirelessly,  
you must install CameraWindow.  
When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.  
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This may damage  
the devices.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize each other  
immediately. In this case, try holding the devices together in slightly different  
positions.  
Checking Your Computer Environment  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
- Do not place other objects between the camera and smartphone. Also,  
note that camera or smartphone covers or similar accessories may block  
communication.  
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following  
operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility  
information, including upport in new operating systems, visit the Canon  
website.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
For details on this application (supported smartphones and included functions),  
refer to the Canon website.  
Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark ( ). For details, refer  
to the smartphone user manual.  
Windows  
Mac OS  
Mac OS X 10.9  
Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later  
Mac OS X 10.7  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Opera
Sys
Windo8/8.1  
WindowSP1  
Wdows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.  
Wiows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)  
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media  
Feature Pack.  
For details, check the following website.  
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
     
Before Use  
Installing the Software  
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.  
3 When a message is displayed  
prompting you to connect the  
camera, choose whether to  
connect or not.  
When Connecting the Camera to  
the Computer  
zzWith the camera turned off, open the  
cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the  
USB cable in the orientation shown,  
insert the plug fully into the camera  
terminal ( ).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
What you will need:  
zzComputer  
zzUSB cable (camera end: Mini-B)*  
* A USB cable is not included. Although you can install the software without using a  
cable, some features will not be added.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
1 Download the software.  
zzWith a computer connected to the  
Internet, access http://www.canon.com/  
icpd/.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzAccess the site for your country or region.  
zzDownload the software.  
zzInsert the larger plug of the USB cable  
in the computer’s USB port. For details  
about USB connections on the computer,  
refer to the computer user manual.  
zzTurn the camera on, and follow the  
on-screen instructions to complete the  
installation process.  
2 Begin the installation.  
zzClick [Easy Installation] and fow
on-screen instructions to colete the  
installation process.  
Index  
Without Connecting the Camera  
zzSelect [Install without connecting  
the device] and follow the on-screen  
instructions to complete the installation  
process.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
   
Before Use  
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi  
4 Install the files.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzInstallation may take some time,  
depending on computer performance and  
the Internet connection.  
Connection (Windows Only)  
On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before  
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.  
zzClick [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen  
after installation.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Confirm that the computer is  
connected to an access point.  
zzFor instructions on checking your network  
connection, refer to the computer user  
manual.  
zzAfter installation when the camera is  
connected to the computer, turn the  
camera off before disconnecting the  
cable.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzClick in the following order: [Start] menu  
► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►  
[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection  
setup].  
Because the content and functions of software vary according to the camera  
model, if you have several cameras, you must use each camera to update to  
its latest version of the software.  
zzIn the application that opens, follow the  
on-screen instructions and configure the  
setting.  
The following Windows settings are configured when you run the utility in step  
2.  
Index  
- Turn on media streaming.  
This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access via Wi-Fi.  
- Turn on network discovery.  
This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera.  
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).  
This allows you to check the network connection status.  
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).  
This will enable network devices to detect each other automatically.  
Some security software may prevent you from completing the settings as  
described here. Check the settings of your security software.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
 
Before Use  
Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu  
When connecting wirelessly to any device other than a computer, a memory  
card must be inserted in the camera. Additionally, the memory card must  
contain images before you can access Web services or connect to a printer  
wirelessly.  
To change the camera’s nickname, choose MENU (=24) > [3] tab > [Wi-Fi  
Settings] > [Change Device Nickname].  
If the Wi-Fi menu is not displayed but only the information changes when  
you press the <o> button, first press the <p> button to switch from detailed  
information display (=90).  
A message will displayed if the nickname you attempt to enter in step 2  
begins with a sol or space. Press the <m> button and enter a different  
nicknam
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Initial Connection via Wi-Fi  
To start with, register a camera nickname.  
This nickname will be displayed on the screen of target devices when  
connecting to other devices via Wi-Fi.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.  
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera  
on.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzPress the <o> button.  
e Initl Wi-Fi Connection  
2 Enter a nickname.  
Oncave connected to devices via Wi-Fi, recent destinations will  
listfirst when you access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the <o>  
on. u can easily connect again by pressing the <o><p> buttons  
oose he device name and then pressing the <m> button.  
dd a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the  
q><r> buttons, and then configure the setting.  
zzPress the <m> button to access the  
keyboard, and then enter a nickname  
(=25).  
zzUp to 16 characters can be ud.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons turn the  
<5> dial to choose [OK], anhen pres
the <m> button.  
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU (=24) >  
[3] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off].  
Index  
zzThe Wi-Fi menu is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
       
Before Use  
Check sheet  
Connecting via an Access Point  
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.  
Also refer to the access point user manual.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Network name (SSID/ESSID)  
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use.  
Also called the “access point name” or “network name”.  
○ None  
○ WEP (open system  
authentication)  
○ WPA-PSK (TKIP)  
Confirming Access Point Compatibility  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Network authentication / data encryption  
(encryption method / encryption mode)  
Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi  
If you are already using Wi-Fi, confirm the following items. For instructions  
on checking network settings, refer to the access point user manual.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. ○ WPA-PSK (AES)  
○ WPA2-PSK (TKIP)  
○ WPA2-PSK (AES)  
P Mode  
Password (encon / network key)  
The key used when ng data during wireless  
transmso called “encryption key” or “network  
key”
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
If system administrator status is needed to adjust network settings,  
contact the system administrator for details.  
These settings are very important for network security. Exercise  
adequate caution when changing these settings.  
Key inmit key)  
key en WEP is used for network authentication / ○ 1  
encryon.  
ction ethods vary depending on whether the access point supports  
rotected Setup (WPS) or not. Refer to the user manual provided with  
ccess point to check if it supports WPS.  
A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for connecting  
multiple computers. A router that contains an internal Wi-Fi function is called a  
“Wi-Fi router”.  
Index  
This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access points”.  
If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure to add the  
camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can check your camera’s  
MAC address by choosing MENU (=24) > [3] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] >  
[Check MAC Address].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
       
Before Use  
Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access  
Points  
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over Wi-  
Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN Method for  
settings on a WPS supported device.  
zzTo connect to a Web service, choose  
the service icon. If multiple recipients  
or sharing options are used with a Web  
service, choose the desired item on the  
[Select Recipient] screen (either press  
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <5>  
dial), and then press the <m> button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Confirm that the target device is  
connected to the access point.  
zzThis step is not required when connecting  
to Web services.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
4 Choose [Add a Device].  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Add a Device], and  
then press the <m> button.  
zzTo connect to a smartphone or printer,  
when the [Waiting to connect] screen  
(=130) is displayed, choose [Switch  
Network] (either press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <5> dial), and then  
press the <m> button.  
P Mode  
zzFor instructions on checking the  
connection, refer to the device and  
access point user manuals.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Access the Wi-Fi menu  
(=123).  
3 Choose the target device
zzChoose the target device (eir press  
the <o><p><q><r> buttoor turn  
the <5> dial), and then preshe <m>  
button.  
zzA list of detected access points will be  
displayed.  
5 Choose [WPS Connection].  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [WPS Connection],  
and then press the <m> button.  
Index  
zzTo connect to a smartphone, choose ].  
zzTo connect to a computer, choose [ ].  
zzTo connect to a printer, choose [2].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
       
Before Use  
6 Choose [PBC Method].  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [PBC Method], and  
then press the <m> button.  
8 For a smartphone connection:  
Start CameraWindow.  
zzFor an NFC-compatible Android  
smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later),  
activating NFC and touching the  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
smartphone against the camera’s N-Mark  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
(
, =119) will start CameraWindow  
on the smartphone.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
7 Establish the connection.  
zzOn the access point, hold down the WPS  
connection button for a few seconds.  
zzFor other smartphones, start  
CameraWindow on the smartphone.  
zzThe first time CameraWindow is opened,  
register a smartphone nickname to be  
displayed on the camera.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzOn the camera, press the <m> button to  
go to the next step.  
zzOnce the smartphone is recognized on  
the camera, the device connection screen  
will be displayed on the camera.  
zzThe camera will connect to the access  
point.  
zzIf you have selected [ ], [2], or [ ] in  
step 3, devices connected to tss  
point are listed on the [SelecDevice]  
screen displayed next.  
zzIf you have selected a Web sece in  
step 3, go to step 12.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
 
Before Use  
9 To connect to a smartphone,  
printer, or computer:  
Choose the target device.  
zzChoose the target device name (either  
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
11 For a smartphone connection:  
Adjust the privacy setting.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Yes], and then  
press the <m> button.  
zzYou can now use the smartphone to  
browse, import, or geotag (=141)  
images on the camera or shoot remotely  
(=141).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzIf you have selected a smartphone, go to  
step 11.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzIf you have selected a printer or  
Macintosh computer, go to step 12.  
P Mode  
12 Send or print the images.  
zzThe screen displayed when the devices  
are connected varies depending on the  
target device.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
10 If you have selected a computer  
running Windows in step 9 for  
the first time:  
zzWhen the camera is connected to a  
smartphone or Web service, an image  
transfer screen is displayed.  
Install a driver.  
zzWhen the screen at left is displayed on  
the camera, click the Start menhe  
computer, click [Control Panand then  
click [Add a device].  
zzFor instructions on sending images, see  
zzWhen the camera is connected to a  
computer, the camera screen is blank.  
the computer.  
zzDouble-click the connected came
zzDriver installation will begin.  
zzAfter driver installation is complete, and  
the camera and computer connection  
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be  
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on  
the camera screen.  
Index  
zzWhen the camera is connected to a  
printer, you can print by following the  
same steps as for printing via USB. For  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
127  
     
Before Use  
Connecting to Access Points in the List  
All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected  
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 11. To keep camera  
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone,  
choose [No] in step 11.  
To change privacy settings for smartphones added to the list,  
choose the smartphone whose settings you want to change from  
[Edit a Device] in step 4, and then choose [View Settings].  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1 View the listed access points.  
zzView the listed networks (access  
points) as described in steps 1 – 4 of  
“Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access  
Points” (=125).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Choose an access point.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose a network (access  
point), and then press the <m> button.  
If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed on the  
screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point. Choose a device in the  
[Select a Device] screen. For further details, refer to the user manual included  
with your access point.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
To add multiple destinations, repeat this procedure from the first step.  
Previous Access Points  
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following  
step 4 in “Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points” (=125).  
To reconnect to the access point, confirm that the target device is already  
connected to it, and then follow the procedure from step 9. Nothhis  
step is not required when connecting to Web services.  
3 Enter the access point  
password.  
zzPress the <m> button to access the  
keyboard, and then enter the password  
(=124).  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Next], and then  
press the <m> button.  
To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the scrn  
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow th
procedure from step 5.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
Before Use  
4 Choose [Auto].  
Connecting without an Access Point  
When connecting to a smartphone or printer via Wi-Fi, you can use the  
camera as an access point (Camera Access Point mode) instead of using  
another access point.  
Similarly, no access point is used in camera-to-camera connections  
(=132).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Auto], and then  
press the <m> button.  
zzIf you selected [ ], [2], or [ ] as the  
target device, see “Connecting to WPS-  
Compatible Access Points”, starting with  
step 9 (=127).  
zzIf you selected a Web service as the  
destination, see “Connecting to WPS-  
Compatible Access Points”, starting with  
step 12 (=127).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu  
(=123).  
P Mode  
2 Choose the target device.  
zzChoose the target device (either press  
the <o><p><q><r> buttons or turn  
the <5> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
To determine the access point password, check on the access point itself or  
refer to the user manual.  
Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are detected,  
choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to manually set an access point. Follow on
screen instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.  
When you use an access point that you have already connected for  
connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the password itep 3. To  
use the same password, choose [Next] (either press the <o><buttons or  
turn the <5> dial) and press the <m> button.  
zzTo connect to a smartphone, choose [ ].  
zzTo connect to a printer, choose [2].  
3 Choose [Add a Device].  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Add a Device], and  
then press the <m> button.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
     
Before Use  
zzThe camera’s SSID is displayed.  
5 For a smartphone connection:  
Start CameraWindow.  
zzFor an NFC-compatible Android  
smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later),  
activating NFC and touching the  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
smartphone against the camera’s N-Mark  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
(
, =119) will start CameraWindow  
on the smartphone.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
4 Connect the target device to the  
network.  
zzIn the smartphone or printer’s Wi-Fi  
setting menu, choose the SSID (network  
name) displayed on the camera to  
connect to it.  
zzFor other smartphones, start  
CameraWindow on the smartphone.  
zzThe first time CameraWindow is opened,  
register a smartphone nickname to be  
displayed on the camera.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzOnce the smartphone is recognized on  
the camera, the device connection screen  
will be displayed on the camera.  
6 Choose the target device.  
zzChoose the target device name (either  
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
   
Before Use  
7 For a smartphone connection:  
Adjust the privacy setting.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Yes], and then  
press the <m> button.  
To add multiple devices, repeat this procedure from the first step.  
For better security, you can require password input on the screen in step 3  
by accessing MENU (=24) and choosing [3] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] >  
[Password] > [On]. In this case, in the password field on the device in step 4,  
enter the password displayed on the camera.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzYou can now use the smartphone to  
browse, import, or geotag (=141)  
images on the camera or shoot remotely  
(=141).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
8 Send or print the images.  
zzThe screen displayed when the devices  
are connected varies depending on the  
target device.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzWhen the camera is connected to a  
smartphone, an image transfer screen is  
displayed.  
zzFor instructions on sending imges, ee  
zzWhen the camera is connectto a  
printer, you can print by followithe  
same steps as for printing via USo
Index  
All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected  
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 7. To keep camera  
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone,  
choose [No] in step 7.  
To change privacy settings for smartphones added to the list,  
choose the smartphone whose settings you want to change from  
[Edit a Device] in step 3, and then choose [View Settings].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
 
Before Use  
Previous Access Points  
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following  
step 3 in “Connecting without an Access Point” (=129).  
To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the  
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose  
[Camera Access Point Mode].  
Connecting to Another Camera  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as follows.  
Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be connected  
to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-Fi cards cannot  
be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function. You cannot connect to  
PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS  
cameras with this camera.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
When reconnecting via a previous access point, connect the target  
device to the access point in step 4.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen  
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the  
procedure in “Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points” from step  
5 (=125).  
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu  
(=123).  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Choose camera.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <5> dial to choose [4], and  
then press the <m> button.  
3 Choose [Add a Device].  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Add a Device], and  
then press the <m> button.  
Index  
zzFollow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera  
too.  
zzCamera connection information will be  
added when [Start connection on target  
camera] is displayed on both camera  
screens.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132  
   
Before Use  
zzWhen the target camera has been added  
successfully, the image transfer screen  
will be displayed. Proceed to “Sending  
Images” (=133).  
Sending Images  
Send images wirelessly to destinations registered on the camera as follows.  
Note that when images are sent to a computer, the computer is used  
instead of the camera (=136).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Sending Images Individually  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
To add multiple cameras, repeat this procedure from the first step.  
Once a camera is added, the camera name will be displayed on the screen in  
step 3. To connect to a camera again, simply choose the camera name from  
the list.  
1 Choose an image.  
zzTurn the <5> dial to choose an image  
to send.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
     
Before Use  
2 Send the image.  
Keep your fingers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area (=3).  
Covering this may decrease the speed of your image transfers.  
Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take a long  
time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera battery level.  
When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image quality  
varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the smartphone user  
manual.  
To disconnect from the camera, press the <n> button, choose [OK] on  
the confirmation screen (either press the <q><r> buttons or turn the <5>  
dial), and then ss the <m> button. You can also use the smartphone to  
end the connec.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose  
[Send this image], and then press the  
<m> button.  
zzWhen uploading to YouTube, read the  
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and  
press the <m> button.  
zzImage transfer will begin. The screen  
darkens during image transfer.  
zzAfter images are uploaded to a Web  
service, [OK] is displayed. Press the  
<m> button to return to the playback  
screen.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
On the n, less signal strength is indicated by the following icons.  
[
] high, [ um, [ ] low, [ ] weak  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
images Web services will take less time when resending images  
already sthat are still on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.  
zzAfter sending images to a camera or  
smartphone, [Transfer completed] will be  
displayed, and the display will return to  
the image transfer screen.  
Chong the Image Resolution (Size)  
e ime transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the <o><p>  
, anhen press the <m> button. On the next screen, choose the  
on by pressing the <o><p> buttons, and then press the <m>  
.  
For movies that you do not compress (=112), a separ,  
compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note at this  
may delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unlethere is  
enough space for it on the memory card.  
To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.  
Choosing [ ] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected  
size before sending.  
Index  
Movies cannot be resized.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134  
   
Before Use  
Sending Multiple Images  
Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. One movie up to five minutes  
(or one digest movie up to 13 minutes) can be sent. However, Web services  
may limit the number of images or length of movies you can send. For details,  
refer to the Web service you are using.  
You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom lever twice toward  
<k> to access single-image display and then pressing the <q><r> buttons or  
turning the <5> dial.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1 Choose [Select and send].  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose  
[Select and send], and then press the  
<m> button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
In step 3, you can choose the desired resolution (size) of your images before  
sending (=46).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
2 Choose images.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to  
choose an image to send, and then press  
the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.  
zzTo cancel selection, press the <m>  
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.  
zzRepeat this process to choose additional  
images.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzAfter you finish choosing imas, press  
the <n> button.  
3 Send the images.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turhe  
<5> dial to choose [Send], and then  
press the <m> button.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
Before Use  
Adding Comments  
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to  
e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of characters  
and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web service.  
Saving Images to a Computer  
When sending images to a computer, use the computer instead of the  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
camera.  
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.  
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some  
software excluded).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Access the screen for adding  
comments.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to  
choose [ ], and then press the <m>  
button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Display CameraWindow.  
zzWindows: Access CameraWindow by  
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon  
Camera].  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzMac OS: CameraWindow is automatically  
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is  
established between the camera and  
computer.  
2 Add a comment (=25).  
3 Send the image.  
2 Import images.  
zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and  
then click [Import Untransferred Images].  
zzImages are now saved to the Pictures  
folder on the computer, in separate  
folders named by date.  
When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON iMGE  
GATEWAY is automatically sent.  
Index  
zzClick [OK] in the screen that is displayed  
after image import is complete. For  
instructions on viewing images on a  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136  
   
Before Use  
Using the < > Button  
Movies will take longer to import since the file size is larger than still images.  
To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.  
You can also specify to save all images or only selected images to the  
computer, and you can change the destination folder. Refer to “Software  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Once you have registered a smartphone or Image Sync (=139) to the  
<
> button, you can connect to the registered destination simply by  
pressing the < > button.  
Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
taskbar.  
Registering a Smartphone to the < > Button  
Once you have connected to a smartphone initially via Wi-Fi by pressing  
the < > button, you n simply press the < > button after that to connect  
again for viewing and ving camera images on connected devices.  
Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the [CameraWindow] icon  
in the Dock.  
Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your  
camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations  
apply.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until  
camera images are accessible.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
1 Press the < > button.  
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.  
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer.  
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information,  
depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image  
file sizes.  
2 Choose the destination.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [ ], and then press  
the <m> button.  
- Some functions provided by the software may not be availableuch as  
movie editing.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
   
Before Use  
3 Establish the connection.  
zzConnect to the smartphone as described  
in steps 5 – 9 in “Connecting to WPS-  
Compatible Access Points” (=125  
127) or steps 4 – 6 in “Connecting  
without an Access Point” (=130).  
zzAfter a connection is established with the  
smartphone, the smartphone nickname  
is displayed on the camera. (This screen  
will close in about one minute.)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Registering Image Sync to the < > Button  
By registering Image Sync to the < > button, you can simply press the  
> button to send any unsent images on the memory card to a computer  
via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. For details on Image Sync, see “Sending  
<
Images Automatically (Image Sync)” (=139).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Prepare the camera.  
zzRegister [ ] as the destination (=117  
119).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
zzYou can now use the smartphone to  
import images from the camera. (The  
camera cannot be used to send images  
to the smartphone.)  
zzInstall the software on the destination  
computer, and configure the camera  
settings (=121).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Press the < > button.  
zzUse the smartphone to end the  
connection; the camera will automatically  
turn off.  
zzFrom now on, you can simply phe  
<
> button to connect to thegistered  
smartphone.  
3 Choose the destination.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [ ], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzThe camera will automatically reconnect  
to any previous access points and send  
the images. (=139)  
When you are in the vicinity of an access point that you ha
previously connected to, the camera will automatically conne
to it in step 2. To change access points, select [Switch Network]  
from the screen that will be displayed when the connection is  
being established, and follow steps 5 – 9 in “Connecting to WPS-  
Compatible Access Points” (=125 127).  
All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected  
smartphone. Note that if you have assigned the < > button, [View  
Settings] (=143) is not available.  
Index  
zzFrom now on, you can simply press the  
<
> button to send images.  
One smartphone can be registered to the < > button. If you wish  
to register a different smartphone, clear the one currently registered  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(=139) first.  
138  
Before Use  
Sending Images Automatically  
(Image Sync)  
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can be  
sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.  
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Clearing Registered Destinations  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Mobile Device Connect Button]  
on the [3] tab (=24).  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Initial Preparations  
zzAfter a confirmation message is  
displayed, press the <m> button.  
Install and configure software on the destination computer.  
P Mode  
1 Install the software.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Registered destinations are also cleared when you reset Wi-Fi settings  
(=144).  
zzInstall the software on a computer  
connected to the Internet (=121).  
2 Register the camera.  
zzWindows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],  
and then click [Add new camera].  
zzMac OS: In the menu bar, click [ ], and  
then click [Add new camera].  
zzA list of cameras linked to CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY (=117) is displayed.  
Choose the camera from which images  
are to be sent.  
Index  
zzOnce the camera is registered and the  
computer is ready to receive images, the  
icon changes to [ ].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
     
Before Use  
3 Choose the type of images  
to send (only when sending  
movies with images).  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab  
(=24).  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
[Image Sync], and then press the  
<q><r> buttons to choose [Stills/  
Movies].  
Sending Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.  
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images  
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. Stored  
images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer and  
save the images.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
choose [ ].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
zzOnce the connection is established, the  
images are sent.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzWhen the images have been sent  
successfully to the CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY server, [ ] is displayed on  
the screen.  
zzImages are automatically saved to the  
computer when you turn it on.  
zzImages are automatically sent to Web  
services from the CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY server, even if the computer  
is off.  
Index  
When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery pack  
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, =156).  
Even if images were imported to the computer through a different method, any  
images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY will be sent to  
the computer.  
Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same network as  
the camera, because images are sent via the access point instead of CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images stored on the computer are sent to  
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so the computer must be connected to the Internet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
Before Use  
Geotagging Images on the Camera  
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow  
application (=119) can be added to images on the camera. Images are  
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.  
Shooting Remotely  
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to  
shoot remotely.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1 Secure the camera.  
Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home time  
Additionally, in [Time Zone] (=147), specify any shooting  
destinations that are in other time zones.  
The smartphone you will use for geotagging must be authorized to  
view the images on the camera (=127, 131).  
Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data  
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing  
these images with others, as when posting images online where  
many others can view them.  
zzOnce remote shooting begins, the  
camera lens will come out. Lens motion  
from zooming may also move the camera  
out of position. Keep the camera still by  
mounting it on a tripod or taking other  
measures.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
smartphone (=115).  
zzIn the privacy settings (=127, 131),  
choose [Yes].  
3 Choose remote shooting.  
zzIn CameraWindow (=119) on the  
smartphone, choose remote shooting.  
zzThe camera lens will come out. Do not  
press near the lens, and make sure no  
objects will obstruct it.  
Index  
zzOnce the camera is ready for remote  
shooting, a live image from the camera  
will be displayed on the smartphone.  
zzAt this time, a message is displayed on  
the camera, and all operations except  
pressing the power button are disabled.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
     
Before Use  
4 Shoot.  
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzUse the smartphone to shoot.  
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.  
The camera works in [G] mode during remote shooting. However,  
some FUNC. and MENU settings you have configured in advance  
may be changed automatically.  
Editing Connection Information  
Movie shooting is not available.  
In camera settings, the smartphone must be allowed to view camera  
images (=127, 131).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu  
(=123).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Choose a device to edit.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <5> dial to choose the icon  
of the device to edit, and then press the  
<m> button.  
Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the connection  
environment will not affect recorded images.  
No AF frames are displayed. Capture a test image to check the focus.  
Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the smartphone  
to browse and import images from the camera.  
Remote control is also possible from the smartphone assigned to the <  
button (=137).  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
>
3 Choose [Edit a Device].  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Edit a Device], and  
then press the <m> button.  
Index  
4 Choose a device to edit.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose the device to edit,  
and then press the <m> button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
   
Before Use  
5 Choose an item to edit.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an item to edit, and  
then press the <m> button.  
zzThe items you can change depend on  
what device or service the camera will  
access.  
Changing a Device Nickname  
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on  
the camera.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzFollowing step 5 in “Editing Connection  
Information” (=143), choose [Change  
Device Nickname] and press the <m>  
button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Connection  
Web  
Configurable Items  
zzSelect the input field and press the <m>  
button. Use the keyboard displayed to  
enter a new nickname (=25).  
4
c
P Mode  
Services  
O
O
O
O
O
O
[Change Device Nickname] (=143)  
[View Settings] (=127, 131)  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Eonnectn Information  
Erase on informan (information about devices that you have  
nnect) as follows.  
O
O
O
[Erase Connection Info] (=143)  
O
: Configurable : Not configurable  
zzFollowing step 5 in “Editing Connection  
Information” (=143), choose [Erase  
Connection Info] and press the <m>  
button.  
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial to  
choose [OK], and then press the <m>  
button.  
Index  
zzThe connection information will be  
erased.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
       
Before Use  
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default  
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the camera  
to another person, or dispose of it.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab  
(=24).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Choose [Reset Settings].  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Reset Settings],  
and then press the <m> button.  
3 Restore the default setngs.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or tthe  
<5> dial to choose [OK], and thes  
the <m> button.  
Index  
zzThe Wi-Fi settings are now reset.  
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be sure  
that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.  
To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose [Reset All] in the  
[3] tab (=152).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
 
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Setting Menu  
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Formatting Memory .................149  
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions.............. 146  
File Numbering.......................151  
Date-Bage S.................151  
Metric on-Metric Dis...................151  
CheckiCertification Lo.....................152  
Display nguage ..............................................152  
Adjusting ther Sets .....................................152  
Restoring ults..........................................152  
Silencing Camera Operations .............................146  
Adjusting the Volume ..........................................146  
Hiding Hints and Tips ..........................................146  
Date and Time.....................................................147  
World Clock.........................................................147  
Lens Retraction Timing .......................................147  
Using Eco Mode..................................................148  
Power-Saving Adjustment...................................148  
Screen Brightness...............................................149  
Hiding the Start-Up Screen .................................149  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
 
Before Use  
Adjusting the Volume  
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.  
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
MENU (=24) functions on the [3] tab can be configured. Customize  
commonly used functions as desired, for greater convenience.  
zzChoose [Volume], and then press the  
<m> button.  
zzChoose an item, and then press the  
<q><r> buttons to adjust the volume.  
Silencing Camera Operations  
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzChoose [Mute], and then choose [On].  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
HiHints nd Tips  
Hints re normalhown when you choose FUNC. (=23) or  
ENU items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.  
Operation can also be silenced by holding down the <l> button as you  
turn the camera on.  
Sound is not played during movies (=89) if you mute camera nds. To  
restore sound during movies, press the <o> button. Adjust voluwith the  
<o><p> buttons, as needed.  
zzChoose [Hints & Tips], and then choose  
[Off].  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
       
Before Use  
Date and Time  
Adjust the date and time as follows.  
2 Switch to the destination time  
zone.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [ World], and then  
press the <n> button.  
zz[ ] is now shown on the shooting screen  
(=178).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzChoose [Date/Time], and then press the  
<m> button.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an  
option, and then adjust the setting, either  
by pressing the <o><p> buttons or  
turning the <5> dial.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (=15) will automatically  
update your [  
ome] time and date.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
World Clock  
LeRetraon Timing  
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you travel  
abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to that time zone. This  
convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date/Time setting manually.  
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your  
The lmally retred for safety about one minute after you press  
he <1n in Shooting mode (=21). To have the lens retracted  
ediaafter you press the <1> button, set the retraction timing to  
.].  
zzChoose [Lens Retract], and then choose  
[0 sec.].  
1 Specify your destinati.  
zzChoose [Time Zone], and theress the  
<m> button.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or tu
<5> dial to choose [ World], and then  
press the <m> button.  
Index  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose the  
destination.  
zzTo set daylight saving time (1 hour  
ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the  
<o><p> buttons or turning the <5>  
dial, and then choose [ ] by pressing  
the <q><r> buttons.  
zzPress the <m> button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
       
Before Use  
Using Eco Mode  
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode. When  
the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery  
consumption.  
Power-Saving Adjustment  
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto Power  
Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (=21).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzChoose [Power Saving], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzAfter choosing an item, press the  
<q><r> buttons to adjust it as needed.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzChoose [Eco Mode], and then choose  
[On].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zz[ ] is now shown on the shooting  
screen (=178).  
P Mode  
zzThe screen darkens when the camera  
is not used for approximately two  
seconds; approximately ten seconds  
after darkening, the screen turns off.  
The camera turns off after approximately  
three minutes of inactivity.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
serve bary power, you should normally choose [On] for  
wer Dowand [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].  
Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power Down] to [Off].  
The power-saving functions are not available when you have set Eco mode  
(=) to [On].  
2 Shoot.  
zzTo activate the screen and ppare for  
shooting when the screen is but the  
lens is still out, press the shuttbutton  
halfway.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
     
Before Use  
Screen Brightness  
Adjust screen brightness as follows.  
Formatting Memory Cards  
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you  
should format the card with this camera.  
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy  
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them  
up.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzChoose [LCD Brightness], and then  
press the <q><r> buttons to adjust the  
brightness.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Access the [Format] screen.  
zzChoose [Format], and then press the  
<m> button.  
P Mode  
For maximum brightness, press and hold the <l> button for at least  
two seconds when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-image  
display. (This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting on the [3] tab.) To  
restore the original brightness, press and hold the <l> button again for at  
least two seconds or restart the camera.  
2 Choose [OK].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
[Cancel], choose [OK] (either press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial),  
and then press the <m> button.  
Hiding the Start-Up Screen  
If you prefer, you can deactivate display of the start-up screen mally  
shown when you turn the camera on.  
Index  
zzChoose [Start-up Image], and then  
choose [Off].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
       
Before Use  
3 Format the memory card.  
zzTo begin the formatting process, press  
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <5>  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
<m> button.  
zzWhen formatting is finished, [Memory  
card formatting complete] is displayed.  
Press the <m> button.  
Low-Level Formatting  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is  
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing is  
slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly stops.  
Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-level  
formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other  
steps to back them up.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzOn the screen in step 1 of “Formatting  
Memory Cards” (=149), press the  
<o><p> buttons or turn the <5> dial  
to choose [Low Level Format], and then  
press the <q><r> buttons to select this  
option. A [ ] icon is displayed.  
Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file  
management information on the card and does not erase the data  
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards, take  
steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically  
destroying cards.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory  
Cards” (=149) to continue with the  
formatting process.  
The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than  
the advertised capacity.  
because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card.  
You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing [Stop]. In this  
case, all data will be erased, but the memory card can be used normally.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
 
Before Use  
File Numbering  
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)  
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change  
how the camera assigns file numbers.  
Date-Based Image Storage  
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the  
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzChoose [Create Folder], and then choose  
[Daily].  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzChoose [File Numbering], and then  
choose an option.  
zzImages will now be saved in folders  
created on the shooting date.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
/ Non-etric Display  
Changt of measument shown in GPS elevation information  
141)zoom bar (=28), the MF indicator (=74), and  
here om m/cm to ft/in as needed.  
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th shot is taken/  
saved) even if you switch memory cards.  
Continuous  
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory cards, or  
when a new folder is created.  
Auto Reset  
Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be nu
consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly erted  
memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001, use an empty (ormatted  
(=149)) memory card.  
folder structure and image formats.  
zzChoose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
       
Before Use  
Checking Certification Logos  
Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be viewed  
on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on the  
camera packaging, or on the camera body.  
Adjusting Other Settings  
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [3] tab.  
[Video System] (=159)  
[Ctrl via HDMI] (=158)  
[Wi-Fi Settings] (=113)  
[Mobile Device Connect Button] (=139)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzChoose [Certification Logo Display], and  
then press the <m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Restoring Dfaults  
P Mode  
If you accidentahae a setting, you can restore default camera  
settings.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Display Language  
Change the display language as needed.  
1 Access the [Reset All] screen.  
zzChoose [Reset All], and then press the  
<m> button.  
zzChoose [Language ], and thss  
the <m> button.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> uttons or  
turn the <5> dial to choose nguage
and then press the <m> button
2 Restore default settings.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Index  
You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by pressing and  
holding the <m> button and immediately pressing the <n> button.  
zzDefault settings are now restored.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
       
Before Use  
The following functions are not restored to default settings.  
- Information registered using Face ID (=40)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
[Language  
] (=152), and [Video System] (=159)  
- Custom white balance data you have recorded (=72)  
- Shooting mode chosen in [K] (=55) or [ ] (=57) mode  
- Movie mode (=65)  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
- Wi-Fi settings (=113)  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Accessories  
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and other compatible accessories sold separately  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
System Map .................................................... 155 Using the Software................ 160  
Software................................160  
ComputCoction..................161  
Saving ages to a Co...................161  
Optional Accessories..................................... 156  
Power Supplies ...................................................156  
Other Accessories...............................................156  
Printers................................................................156  
Printing mages .................................... 163  
Easy Pri......................................................163  
Configurinrint Sengs ...................................164  
Printing Moves ........................................166  
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)..............167  
Adding Images to a Photobook...........................169  
Using Optional Accessories.......................... 157  
Playback on a TV................................................157  
Powering the Camera with Household Power.....159  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
 
Before Use  
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.  
System Map  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine  
Canon accessories.  
Included Accessories  
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire,  
etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage  
and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to  
repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you  
may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.  
Battery Pack  
NB-6LH*1  
Battery Charger  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
CB-2LY/CB-2LYE*1  
Wrist Strap  
Note that availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be  
available.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*2  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Memory Card  
Card Reader  
Power  
Computer  
HDMI Cable (camera end: Type D)*3  
Cables  
AC Adapter Kit  
ACK-DC40  
Video  
tem  
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST  
Index  
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible  
Printers  
*1Also available for purchase separately.  
*2A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).  
*3Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
 
Before Use  
Optional Accessories  
The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with  
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).  
For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available  
adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed  
for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability  
varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available.  
Power Supplies  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Accessories  
Battery Pack NB-6LH  
zzRechargeable lithium-ion battery  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU  
zzFor connecting the camera to a computer  
or printer.  
Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE  
zzCharger for Battery Pack NB-6LH  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can attach to know  
the charging status at a glance. Attach the cover so that is visible on a  
charged battery pack, and attach it so that is not visible on an uncharged  
battery pack.  
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST  
zzConnect the camera to a TV to enjoy  
playback on the larger TV screen.  
Battery Pack NB-6L is also supported.  
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC
zzFor powering the camera usi
household power. Recommend when  
using the camera over extended eriods
or when connecting the camera to a  
printer or computer. Cannot be used to  
charge the battery pack in the camera.  
rinters  
Canon-Brand PictBridge-  
Compatible Printers  
zzPrinting images without a computer is  
possible by connecting the camera to  
a Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible  
printer.  
Index  
For details, visit your nearest Canon  
retailer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Movies  
zzOn the camera, open the terminal cover  
and insert the cable plug fully into the  
camera terminal.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Using Optional Accessories  
Still Images  
Playback on a TV  
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger  
screen of the TV.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.  
3 Turn the TV on and switch to  
video input.  
zzSwitch the TV input to the video input you  
connected the cable to in step 2.  
Some information may not be displayed on the TV (=179).  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Still Images  
Movies  
4 Turn the camera on.  
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera  
on.  
Playback on a High-Definition TV  
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV  
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m, with a  
Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at a resolution of [  
zzImages from the camera are now  
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is  
displayed on the camera screen.)  
zzWhen finished, turn off the camera and  
TV before disconnecting the cable.  
]
[
] or [  
] can be viewed in high definition.  
1 Make sure the camera nd TV  
are off.  
Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is connected to an  
HDTV.  
2 Connect the camera to the V.  
zzOn the TV, insert the cable plug fully into  
the HDMI input as shown.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
       
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
4 Control the camera with the TV  
remote.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons on the remote  
to browse images.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Controlling the Camera with a TV Remote  
Connecting the camera to an HDMI CEC-compatible TV enables playback  
(including slideshow playback) using the TV remote control.  
Depending on the TV, you may need to adjust some TV settings. For  
details, refer to the TV manual.  
zzTo display the camera control panel,  
press the OK/Select button. Select  
control panel options by pressing the  
<q><r> buttons to choose an option,  
and then pressing the OK/Select button  
again.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Ctrl via HDMI] on the [3] tab, and then  
choose [Enable] (=24).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Camera CoPanel Options Shown on the TV  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Closes the menu.  
(=53), or [ ] (=64) mode. (Only displayed  
when a grouped image is selected.)  
]
2 Connect the camera to the TV.  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Playback on a  
High-Definition TV” (=157) to connect  
the camera to the TV.  
Playback  
Starts movie playback. (Only displayed when a movie  
is selected.)  
Play ovie  
Slideshow  
Starts slideshow playback. To switch images during  
playback, press the <q><r> buttons on the remote  
control.  
3 Display images.  
zzTurn on the TV. On the camepress the  
<1> button.  
Index Playback  
Change Display  
Displays multiple images in an index.  
Index  
zzImages from the camera are now  
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is  
displayed on the camera screen.)  
l
Switches display modes (=90).  
Pressing buttons, such as the <n> button, on the camera will switch  
control to the camera itself, which will prevent remote control until you return to  
single-image display.  
Moving the zoom lever on the camera will switch control to the camera itself,  
which will prevent remote control until you return to single-image display.  
The camera may not always respond correctly even if the remote is for an  
HDMI CEC-compatible TV.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
 
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while previewing  
shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow the same steps as when  
using the camera screen. However, AF-Point Zoom (=49), MF-Point Zoom  
(=75) and MF Peaking (=75) are not available.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Playback on a Standard-Definition TV  
Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST  
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the  
TV as you control the camera.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Make sure the camera and TV  
Powering the Camera with Household Power  
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 (sold separately)  
eliminates the need tmonitor the remaining battery level.  
are off.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
White  
Red  
2 Connect the camera to the TV.  
Yellow  
P Mode  
Yellow  
zzOn the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into  
the video inputs as shown.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
1 Make sure the camera is off.  
Red  
White  
2 Insert the coupler.  
zzFollow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery  
Pack and Memory Card” (=13) to  
open the cover.  
zzOn the camera, open the terminal cover  
and insert the cable plug fully into the  
camera terminal.  
zzInsert the coupler facing the direction  
shown, just as you would a battery pack  
(following step 2 in “Inserting the Battery  
Pack and Memory Card” (=13)).  
zzFollow step 4 in “Inserting the Battery  
Pack and Memory Card” (=13) to  
close the cover.  
Terminals  
3 Display images.  
zzFollow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback o
High-Definition TV” (=157) to display  
images.  
Index  
3 Connect the adapter to the  
coupler.  
zzOpen the cover and insert the adapter  
plug fully into the coupler.  
Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output  
format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the  
video output format, press the <n> button and choose [Video  
System] on the [3] tab.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
     
Before Use  
4 Connect the power cord.  
zzInsert one end of the power cord into the  
compact power adapter, and then plug  
the other end into a power outlet.  
Using the Software  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced  
below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer.  
zzTurn the camera on and use it as desired.  
zzWhen finished, turn the camera off and  
unplug the power cord from the outlet.  
Software  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it, you  
can do the following things on your computer.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while  
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the  
camera.  
Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing so  
could result in malfunction or damage to the product.  
CameraWindow  
zzImport imageand ange camera settings  
ImageBrowse
zzMages: visearch, and organize  
zzPrimages  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Inet access is required, and any ISP account charges and  
acss fees must be paid separately.  
tware Instruction Manual  
to the instruction manual when using the software. The manual can  
be accessed from the help system of software (some software excluded).  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160  
     
Before Use  
Computer Connections via a Cable  
Saving Images to a Computer  
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.  
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some  
software excluded).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Checking Your Computer Environment  
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed system  
requirements and compatibility information, including support in new  
operating systems, visit the Canon website.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1 Connect the camera to the  
computer.  
zzWith the camera turned off, open the  
cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the  
USB cable in the orientation shown,  
insert the plug fully into the camera  
terminal ( ).  
Windows  
Mac OS  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Windows 8/8.1  
Windows 7 SP1  
Windows Vista SP2  
Windows XP SP3  
Operating  
System*  
Mac OS X 10.9  
Mac OS X 10.8  
Mac OS X 10.7  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
zzInsert the larger plug of the USB cable  
in the computer’s USB port. For details  
about USB connections on the computer,  
refer to the computer user manual.  
Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements, including  
supported OS versions.  
Installing the Software  
2 Turn the camera on to access  
CameraWindow.  
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera  
on.  
Index  
zzMac OS: CameraWindow is displayed  
when a connection is established  
between the camera and computer.  
zzWindows: Follow the steps introduced  
below.  
zzIn the screen that displays, click the [  
]
link to modify the program.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
     
Before Use  
zzChoose [Downloads Images From Canon  
Camera] and then click [OK].  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the  
taskbar.  
Windows Vista or XP: To start CameraWindow, click [Downloads Images From  
Canon Camera] on the screen displayed when you turn the camera on in step  
2. If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the [Start] menu and choose [All  
Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ► [CameraWindow] ► [CameraWindow].  
Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the  
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.  
Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your  
camera to the cputer without using the software, the following limitations  
apply.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzDouble-click [  
].  
P Mode  
- It may tafminutes after you connect the camera to the computer until  
ra image accessible.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
CameraWindow  
3 Save the images to the  
computer.  
zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and  
then click [Import Untransferred Images].  
zzImages are now saved to the Pictures  
folder on the computer, in sepate  
folders named by date.  
shot in vcal orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.  
rotection sgs may be cleared from images saved to a computer.  
problems may occur when saving images or image information,  
ending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image  
filzes.  
- Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as  
movie editing.  
zzAfter images are saved, clos
CameraWindow, press the <1button  
to turn the camera off, and unpluhe  
cable.  
Index  
zzFor instructions on viewing images on a  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162  
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
3 Turn the printer on.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Printing Images  
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer. On  
the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare orders  
for photo development services, and prepare orders or print images for  
photobooks.  
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the  
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by  
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.  
4 Turn the camera on.  
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera  
on.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
5 Choose an image.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an image.  
P Mode  
6 Access the printing screen.  
Still Images  
m
zzPress the < > button, choose [c], and  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Easy Print  
press the < > button again.  
m
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible  
printer (sold separately) with the USB cable.  
1 Make sure the camera and  
printer are off.  
7 Print the image.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [Print], and then  
press the <m> button.  
2 Connect the camera to he  
printer.  
zzOpen the cover. Holding the sler  
cable plug in the orientation showns
the plug fully into the camera terminal.  
zzConnect the larger cable plug to the  
printer. For other connection details, refer  
to the printer manual.  
zzPrinting now begins.  
Index  
zzTo print other images, repeat the above  
procedures starting from step 5 after  
printing is finished.  
zzWhen you are finished printing, turn the  
camera and printer off and disconnect  
the cable.  
For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately), see  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
         
Before Use  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Configuring Print Settings  
Cropping Images before Printing  
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area  
instead of the entire image.  
1 Access the printing screen.  
zzFollow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”  
(=163) to access the screen at left.  
1 Choose [Cropping].  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzAfter following step 1 in “Configuring Print  
Settings” (=164) to access the printing  
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the  
<m> button.  
2 Configure the settings.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn  
the <5> dial to choose an item, and  
then choose an option by pressing the  
<q><r> buttons.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
zzA cropping frame is now displayed,  
indicating the image area to print.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Default  
Date  
Matches current printer settings.  
Prints images with the date added.  
Prints images with the file number added.  
Prints images with both the date and file number added
2 Adjust the cropping frame as  
needed.  
zzTo resize the frame, move the zoom lever  
or turn the <5> dial.  
zzTo move the frame, press the  
<o><p><q><r> buttons.  
zzTo rotate the frame, press the <l>  
button.  
File No.  
Both  
Off  
Default  
Off  
Matches current printer settings.  
Uses information from the time of shooting print unde
optimal settings.  
On  
zzWhen finished, press the <m> button.  
Index  
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.  
3 Print the image.  
zzFollow step 7 in “Easy Print” (=163)  
to print.  
No. of Copies Choose the number of copies to print.  
Cropping  
Specify a desired image area to print (=164).  
Paper  
Settings  
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details  
(=165).  
Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some  
aspect ratios.  
Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with  
[Date Stamp  
] selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164  
       
Before Use  
Still Images  
4 Choose a layout.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an option.  
zzWhen choosing [N-up], press the  
<q><r> buttons to specify the number of  
images per sheet.  
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing  
1 Choose [Paper Settings].  
zzAfter following step 1 in “Configuring Print  
Settings” (=164) to access the printing  
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and  
press the <m> button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the <m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
5 Print the image.  
P Mode  
2 Choose a paper size.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an option, and then  
press the <m> button.  
Available yoOptions  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Default  
Matchent printer settings.  
Bor
Borde
p  
rints with nk space around the image.  
orderless, e-to-edge printing.  
Choose how many images to print per sheet.  
Prints images for identification purposes.  
o  
Only available for images with a resolution of L and an aspect ratio of  
4:3.  
3 Choose a type of pape
zzPress the <o><p> buttons turn the  
<5> dial to choose an optioand then  
press the <m> button.  
Choose the print size.  
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.  
Size  
Index  
Still Images  
Printing ID Photos  
1 Choose [ID Photo].  
zzFollowing steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing Paper  
Size and Layout before Printing” (=165  
165), choose [ID Photo] and press the  
<m> button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
     
Before Use  
Movies  
2 Choose the long and short side  
length.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Printing Movie Scenes  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an item. Choose the  
length by pressing the <q><r> buttons,  
and then press the <m> button.  
1 Access the printing screen.  
zzFollow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”  
(=163) to choose a movie. The screen  
at left is displayed.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Choose a printing method.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn  
the <5> dial to choose [ ], and then  
press the <q><r> buttons to choose the  
printing method.  
3 Choose the printing area.  
zzFollow step 2 in “Cropping Images before  
Printing” (=164) to choose the printing  
area.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
3 Print the image.  
4 Print the image.  
ovirinting Options  
Prints the current scene as a still image.  
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single sheet of  
paper. You can also print the folder number, file number, and elapsed  
time for the frame by setting [Caption] to [On].  
ce  
To cancel printing in progress, press the <m> button.  
[ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand PictBridge-  
Index  
compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166  
Before Use  
Still Images  
Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the  
printer or photo development service, in some cases.  
[ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory  
card has print settings that were configured on another camera.  
Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all  
previous settings.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)  
Batch printing (=169) and ordering prints from a photo development  
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a  
memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of copies,  
as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform to  
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date  
twice.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Still Images  
Specifying [Indwill prevent you from choosing [On] for both [Date] and [File  
No.] at thsamme.  
Index prinis available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible  
s (sold ately).  
Configuring Print Settings  
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and  
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
is printea format matching setting details in [Date/Time] on the  
=14).  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Print Settings] on the [2] tab.  
Choose and configure items as desired  
(=24).  
Still Images  
ting p Printing for Individual Images  
1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.].  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [2] tab,  
Standard  
Index  
One image is printed per sheet.  
and then press the < > button.  
m
Smaller versions of multiple images are pr
per sheet.  
Index  
Print Type  
Both  
On  
Both standard and index formats are printed.  
Images are printed with the shooting date.  
Date  
Off  
On  
Images are printed with the file number.  
File No.  
Off  
All image print list settings are cleared after  
printing.  
On  
Off  
Clear DPOF  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
167  
       
Before Use  
Still Images  
2 Choose an image.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
Setting Up Printing for All Images  
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing  
for Individual Images” (=167), choose  
[Select All Images] and press the <m>  
button.  
zzYou can now specify the number of copies.  
zzIf you specify index printing for the image, it  
is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel index  
printing for the image, press the <m>  
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
3 Specify the number of prints.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to specify the number of prints  
(up to 99).  
zzTo set up printing for other images and  
specify the number of prints, repeat steps  
2 – 3.  
zzPrinting quantity cannot be specified for  
index prints. You can only choich  
images to print, by following ep 2.  
zzWhen finished, press the <n> button  
to return to the menu screen.  
P Mode  
Still Images  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
CAll Imas from the Print List  
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing  
for Individual Images” (=167), choose  
[Clear All Selections] and press the <m>  
button.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Index  
Still Ima
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images  
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing  
[Select Range] and press the <m> button.  
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”  
(=100) to specify images.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
[Order], and then press the <m> button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168  
     
Before Use  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Adding Images to a Photobook  
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)  
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images  
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,  
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when ordering  
printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer.  
zzWhen images have been added to the  
print list (=167 168), the screen  
at left is displayed after you connect  
the camera to a PictBridge-compatible  
printer. Press the <o><p> buttons to  
choose [Print now], and then simply press  
the <m> button to print the images in the  
print list.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Choosing a Selection Method  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Photobook Set-up] on the [1] tab, and  
then choose how you will select images.  
P Mode  
zzAny DPOF print job that you temporarily  
stop will be resumed from the next image.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
[ ] ay be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory  
card has print settings that were configured on another camera.  
Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all  
previous settings.  
After importing images to your computer, also refer to “Software Instruction  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
       
Before Use  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Adding Images Individually  
Adding All Images to a Photobook  
1 Choose [Select].  
[Select All Images] and press the <m>  
button.  
[Select] and press the <m> button.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
2 Choose an image.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Still Images  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
RAll Imes from a Photobook  
[Clear All Selections] and press the <m>  
button.  
zz[ ] is displayed.  
zzTo remove the image from the photobook
press the <m> button again. [ ] is no  
longer displayed.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzRepeat this process to specother  
images.  
zzWhen finished, press the <n> butto
to return to the menu screen.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Appendix  
Helpful information when using the camera  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Troubleshooting............................................. 172 Functions and Men................ 180 Handling Precautions .................................... 188  
Functions Available ig Mo.......180  
FUNC. nu .........................182  
4Shoing Tab Menu...................184  
3Set Tab Menu .............................187  
1Playck Tab Meu .......................................187  
2Print TMenu..........................................187  
Playback MFU. Menu..............................188  
On-Screen Messages..................................... 175  
Specifications................................................. 189  
On-Screen Information .................................. 178  
Shooting (Information Display)............................178  
Playback (Detailed Information Display) .............179  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
 
Before Use  
Shooting  
Troubleshooting  
If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following.  
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer  
Support Help Desk.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Cannot shoot.  
In Playback mode (=88), press the shutter button halfway (=22).  
Strange display on the screen under low light (=23).  
Strange display on the screen when shooting.  
Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are  
recorded in movies.  
Power  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.  
Confirm that the battery pack is charged (=12).  
The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent or LED  
lighting.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Confirm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (=13).  
Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (=14).  
No date stamp is add to images.  
P Mode  
Configure the [Stp  
added to images acally, merely because you have configured the [Date/Time]  
] setting (=14). Note that date stamps are not  
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a  
cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
setti
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.  
Datnot addeshooting modes (=186) in which this setting cannot  
be co=38).  
Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery pack a  
little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals do not touch  
any metal objects.  
flason the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and  
ing not possible (=31).  
If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon after  
charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.  
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (=31).  
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the tenals with a  
cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.  
S Mode] to [Continuous] (=82).  
ise the flash and set the flash mode to [h] (=80).  
Increase the ISO speed (=71).  
The lens is not retracted.  
Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close cover
turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (=14).  
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this case, you  
should set [IS Mode] to [Off] (=82).  
Index  
The battery pack is swollen.  
Shots are out of focus.  
Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if  
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a Canon  
Customer Support Help Desk.  
Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way  
down to shoot (=22).  
Make sure subjects are within focusing range (=190).  
Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (=50).  
Display on a TV  
Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (=159).  
Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.  
Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (=76, 79).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172  
 
Before Use  
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the  
shutter button is pressed halfway.  
To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the  
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button  
halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.  
Subjects are affected by red-eye (=47).  
Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (=50). The red-eye reduction lamp (=3) will be  
activated in flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye reduction  
lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Edit images using red-eye correction (=109).  
Subjects in shots look too dark.  
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting  
is slower.  
Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=150).  
Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [h] (=80).  
Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=69).  
Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (=71, 109).  
Use AE lock or spot metering (=70).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.  
Available setting items ry by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in Each  
Shooting Mode”“FUNMenu”, and “Shooting Tab Menu” (=180 186).  
P Mode  
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.  
Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [!] (=29).  
Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=69).  
Use AE lock or spot metering (=70).  
The Babies or Cicon does not display.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
The d Childreons will not display if the birthday is not set in face  
info40). If the ns still do not display even when you set the birthday,  
re-renformation 40), or make sure that the date/time are set  
orrec47).  
Reduce the lighting on subjects.  
Shots look too dark despite the flash firing (=31).  
Shoot within flash range (=190).  
Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing thash tput  
level (=81, 87).  
otinMovies  
apsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.  
he camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports high-  
ed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the length  
of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time (=149,  
190).  
Increase the ISO speed (=71).  
Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washeout.  
Shoot within flash range (=190).  
Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [!] (=29).  
Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output  
level (=81, 87).  
Index  
[
] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.  
The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to the  
memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.  
Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=150).  
Lower the image quality (=48).  
White dots or similar image artifacts appear in flash shots.  
This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.  
Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (=190).  
Shots look grainy.  
Zooming is not possible.  
Lower the ISO speed (=71).  
High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (=56).  
Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] (=58) and [ ] (=66)  
modes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
Before Use  
Subjects look distorted.  
Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a  
malfunction.  
Wi-Fi  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the <o> button.  
The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and try  
again.  
Playback  
In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnified display or  
index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the Wi-Fi menu  
cannot be accessed during group playback or filtered image display according to  
specified conditions. Cancel group or filtered image playback.  
Playback is not possible.  
Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename files or  
on folder structure and file names.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,  
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.  
Playback stops, or audio skips.  
Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the  
camera (=150).  
There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that  
Cannot add a devicestination.  
P Mode  
A total of 20 itemcoection information can be added to the camera. Erase  
unneedonnectiomation from the camera first, and then add new devices/  
des=142).  
Use or smartpe to register Web services (=116).  
To adphone, first install the dedicated application CameraWindow on your  
artph(=119).  
d a cputer, first install the software CameraWindow on your computer. Also  
your mputer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (=120, 124).  
t use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
have slow read speeds.  
When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may skip  
if computer performance is inadequate.  
Sound is not played during movies.  
Adjust the volume (=89) if you have activated [Mute] (=146) or the sound in  
the movie is faint.  
No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] (=58) or [ ] (=66) mod
because audio is not recorded in these modes.  
s, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.  
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the  
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.  
Memory Card  
The memory card is not recognized.  
Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (=21).  
Index  
Cannot connect to the access point.  
Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the camera  
(=189). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to specify a  
supported channel manually.  
Computer  
Cannot transfer images to a computer.  
When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the  
transfer speed as follows.  
Press the <1> button to enter Playback mode. Hold the <n> button down as  
m
you press the <o> and < > buttons at the same time. On the next screen, press  
the <q><r> buttons to choose [B], and then press the <m> button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174  
Before Use  
Cannot send images.  
The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space on  
the destination device and resend the images.  
On-Screen Messages  
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the  
locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.  
No memory card  
The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory card  
facing the correct way (=14, 13).  
Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you move  
or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent using  
Image Sync via an access point (=139). Before moving or renaming these image  
files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already been sent to  
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Memory card locked  
The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the  
write-protect tab to the unlocked position (=14).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Cannot resize images for sending.  
Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original size.  
Movies cannot be resized.  
Cannot record!  
P Mode  
Shooting was pteithout a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a  
memory card facinrrect way (=14).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.  
Meerror (=50)  
If thmessage isplayed even after you have formatted a supported  
memo=2) and have inserted it facing the correct way (=14), contact  
anostomer Support Help Desk.  
Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [ ] or [  
to reduce sending time (=134).  
]
Movies may take a long time to send.  
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave  
ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz ote  
that images may take a long time to send even when [ ] is displayed
cienpace on card  
is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (=28, 52, 68,  
edit images (=106 110). Either erase unneeded images (=101) or  
rt a memory card with enough free space (=13).  
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect tuch as the  
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices
Charge the battery (=12)  
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing the  
camera or giving it to someone else.  
Reset the Wi-Fi settings (=144).  
No Image.  
Index  
The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.  
Protected! (=98)  
Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play  
back MOV/Cannot play back MP4  
Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.  
It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer,  
or images shot with another camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
 
Before Use  
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/  
Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to  
category/Unselectable image./No identification information  
The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already  
edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that starred (*)  
functions are not available for movies.  
A camera error was detected (error number)  
If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not have  
been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case,  
write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help  
Desk.  
Edit ID Info* ( 95), Magnify* ( 96), Smart Shuffle* ( 97), Rotate* ( 104),  
Favorites ( 105), Edit* ( 106 110), Print List* ( 167), and Photobook  
File Error  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Set-up* ( 169).  
Correct printing (=163) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or  
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is  
connected to the printer
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Grouped images cannot be processed (=55, 53, 64).  
Invalid selection range  
When specifying a range for image selection (=100, 103, 168), you attempted to  
choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.  
P Mode  
Print error  
Check the papesng (=165). If this error message is displayed when the  
setting rect, ree printer and complete the setting on the camera again.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Exceeded selection limit  
More than 998 images were selected for Print List (=167) or Photobook Set-up  
(=169). Choose 998 images or less.  
Print List (=167) or Photobook Set-up (=169) settings could not be saved  
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.  
Ink ull  
Contn Customer pport Help Desk to request assistance with ink  
bsorbacement.  
You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (=98), Erase  
(=101), Favorites (=105), Print List (=167), or Photobook Set-up (169).  
Naming error!  
The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, becauthe highe
supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been reed and  
the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders has been r
On the [3] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset] (=151), or format the  
memory card (=149).  
Index  
Lens Error  
This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is used  
in dusty or sandy locations.  
Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case,  
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176  
Before Use  
Receiving failed  
Insufficient space on card  
Wi-Fi  
Connection failed  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to receive  
images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a memory card  
with sufficient space.  
No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (=124).  
A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the  
connection.  
Receiving failed  
Memory card locked  
The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is set to  
Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Cannot determine access point  
The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try  
reconnecting again.  
the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Receiving failed  
Naming error!  
No access points found  
P Mode  
Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.  
When the highedeumber (999), and the highest image number (9999) have  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
been red on thving camera, images cannot be received.  
When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the  
correct SSID.  
Insace on ver  
Delesary images loaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create space.  
ave tges sent via Image Sync (=139) to your computer.  
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings  
Check the access point security settings (=124).  
IP address conflict  
Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another.  
k neork settings  
to mae sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current  
rk settings.  
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed  
You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.  
Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Blueth devices
and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.  
Index  
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as he  
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.  
Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.  
Sending failed  
Memory card error  
If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted  
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
Before Use  
Remaining time  
(=190)  
Shutter speed  
(=85, 86)  
Aperture value  
(=85, 86)  
Exposure  
compensation level  
(=69)  
ISO speed (=71)  
Grid lines (=48)  
Hybrid Auto mode  
Auto (=35)  
Wind filter (=31)  
Time zone (=147)  
Image stabilization  
(=82)  
MF indicator  
(=74)  
Exposure shift bar  
(=65)  
Exposure level  
(=86)  
Exposure  
compensation bar  
(=69)  
On-Screen Information  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting (Information Display)  
(
(
74), AF lock  
79)  
Blink detection  
(=49)  
AF frame (=76),  
Spot AE point frame  
(=70)  
Date stamp  
(=38)  
i-Contrast (=7
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
(=30)  
Zoom bar (=28)  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
A70),  
F1)  
[  
] e, indicates the number of shots available.  
tery Level  
screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.  
Shooting mode  
(=180),  
Drive mode  
(=39, 79)  
Mercury lamp  
correction (=47),  
White balance  
(=72)  
Battery el  
(=178)  
Still image  
compression  
(=82),  
Resolution (=46)  
Recordable shots*  
(=190)  
Movie quality  
(=48)  
Digital zoom  
magnification  
(=34), Digital  
tele-converter  
Display  
Details  
Scene icon  
(=32)  
Sufficient charge  
Index  
Slightly depleted, but sufficient  
Flash mode  
(=80)  
(Blinking red)  
Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon  
Depleted—charge the battery pack immediately  
Red-eye correction  
(=47)  
My Colors (=73)  
Eco mode (=148)  
[Charge the battery]  
Flash exposure  
compensation /  
Flash output level  
(=81, 87)  
Metering method  
(=70)  
Camera shake  
warning (=31)  
Self-timer (=37)  
IS mode icon  
(=33)  
(=75)  
178  
       
Before Use  
Still images:  
File size  
Playback (Detailed Information Display)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Resolution (=190)  
Movies: Playback  
time (=190)  
Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV  
(=157).  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Summary of Movie Control Panel in "Viewing" (=89)  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Exit  
P Mode  
Play  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
SlMotion (st the playback speed, press the <q><r> buttons or turn  
> dial. No und is played.)  
ward* or Pious Clip (=112) (To continue skipping backward,  
ing down th<m> button.)  
Movies (=28,  
89), High-speed  
burst HQ (=64)  
Current image no. /  
Total no. of images  
Histogram (=90)  
Battery level  
(=178)  
Wi-Fi signal strength  
(=134)  
Image Sync  
Folder number - File  
number (=151)  
White balance  
(=72)  
Mercury lamp  
correction (=47)  
My Colors (=73,  
108), Creative Shot  
effect (=3)  
Focusinange  
(=74)  
Red-eye rection  
(=47, 109
i-Contrast (=71,  
109)  
Digest movies,  
Group playback,  
Image quality  
(movies)  
Compression (image  
quality) / Resolution,  
MP4 (movies)  
(
14)  
Prous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the <m> button.)  
Next me (For fast-forward, keep holding down the <m> button.)  
Shooting mode  
(=180)  
Shutter speed  
(=85, 86)  
Aperture value  
(=85, 86)  
Exposure  
compensation level  
(=69), Exposure  
shift level (=65)  
ISO speed (=71)  
Metering method  
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (=112) (To continue skipping forward, keep  
holding down the <m> button.)  
*
c
Edit (=110)  
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected (=112))  
Index  
(=139)  
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer  
(=163).  
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.  
Image editing  
(=106 110),  
Movie compression  
(=112)  
Favorites (=105)  
Protection (=98)  
During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the previous or  
next clip) by pressing the <q><r> buttons.  
(=70)  
Flash (=80),  
Flash exposure  
compensation  
(=81)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
179  
   
Before Use  
Functions and Menu Tables  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
DBMG  
I
Pt  
E
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Function  
Exposure Compensation (=69)  
Self-Timer (=37)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting  
Modes  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
P Mode  
][$  
Self-Timer Settings (=38)  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
1
Delay*  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2
Shots*  
Flash (=80)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
h
Z
!
O
O
O
O
O
*3  
*3  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Aperture Value (=85, 86)  
Shutter Speed (=85, 86)  
Program Shift (=70)  
AE Lock/FE Lock (=70, 81)*4  
AE Lock (Movie)/Exposure Shift (=65)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
Index  
O
O
*1 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.  
*2 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots.  
*3 Not available, but switches to [Z] in some cases.  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
*4 FE lock not available in [!] flash mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
180  
     
Before Use  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
DBMG  
I
Pt  
E
Function  
Focusing Range (=74, 79)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
e
f
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Tracking AF Subject Selection  
O
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Screen Display (=23)  
No Information Display  
Information Display  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
P Mode  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
Before Use  
FUNC. Menu  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
DBMG  
I
Pt  
E
Function  
Metering Method (=70)  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting  
Modes  
My Colors (=73)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
1
2
P Mode  
*
*
*
White Balance (=72)  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
ISO Speed (=71)  
AUTO  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
100/200/400/800/1600/3200  
Flash Exposure Compensation (=81)  
Flash Output Level (=87)  
Drive Mode (=39, =79)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Index  
3
*
O
*1 White balance is not available.  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
*2 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tone.  
*3 [ ] is set with [f], AF lock, or [t].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182  
   
Before Use  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
D
B
M
G
I
P
t
E
Function  
Still Image Aspect Ratio (=46)  
*1  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Resolution (=46)  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting  
Modes  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
P Mode  
Compression (=82)  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Movie Quality (=46, 48, 67)  
O
*2  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
*1 Only [ ] and [ ] are available.  
*2 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (=).  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
 
Before Use  
4Shooting Tab Menu  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
DBMG  
I
Pt  
E
Function  
AF Frame (=76)  
Face AiAF*1  
Tracking AF  
Center  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting  
Modes  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
AF Frame Size (=76)*2  
P Mode  
Normal  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Small  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Digital Zoom (=34)  
Standard  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Off  
1.6x/2.0x  
AF-Point Zoom (=49)  
On  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Servo AF (=78)  
On  
*3  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Continuous AF (=78)  
Index  
On  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Off  
O
O
AF-assist Beam (=50)  
On  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Off  
O
O
MF-Point Zoom (=75)  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2x/4x  
*1 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode.  
*2 Available when the AF frame is set to [Center].  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
*3 [On] when subject movement is detected in [  
] mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
184  
 
Before Use  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
DBMG  
I
Pt  
E
Function  
Safety MF (=74)  
On  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
MF Peaking Settings (=75)  
Peaking  
On/Off  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Level  
Low/High  
Color  
Red/Blue/Yellow  
P Mode  
Flash Settings (=47, 50, 81, 87)  
Auto  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Flash Mode  
Manual  
On  
Red-Eye Corr.  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Red-Eye Lamp  
Flash Exp. Comp  
Flash Output  
On/Off  
O
On  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Safety FE  
O
i-Contrast (=71)  
Auto  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Index  
Hg Lamp Corr. (=47)  
On/Off  
Safety Shift (=85)  
On  
O
O
O
O
O
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Wind Filter (=31)  
Auto/Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
185  
Before Use  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
DBMG  
I
Pt  
E
Function  
Review image after shooting (=51)  
Off/Quick  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Display Time  
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec./Hold  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Off  
Display Info  
Detailed  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Blink Detection (=49)  
On  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
P Mode  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Grid Lines (=48)  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
On/Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
IS Settings (=82, 83)  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
IS Mode  
Continuous  
Shoot Only  
1
2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Dynamic IS  
O
O
Framing Assist – Display Area (=35)  
Large/Medium/Small  
Framing Assist – Auto  
On/Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Index  
Date Stamp (=38)  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Date/Date & Time  
Digest Type (=30)  
Include Stills/No Stills  
O
O
Face ID Settings (=40)  
On/Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Names of people in shots taken using Face ID (=40) may not be displayed in some modes or  
with some settings, but they will be recorded in the still images.  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186  
   
Before Use  
3Set Up Tab Menu  
1Playback Tab Menu  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Item  
Ref. Page  
Item  
File Numbering  
Create Folder  
Units  
Ref. Page  
Item  
List/Play Digest Movies  
Slideshow  
Ref. Page  
Item  
Ref. Page  
Mute  
Resize  
Volume  
My Colors  
Hints & Tips  
Date/Time  
Erase  
Face ID Info  
Transition Effect  
Index Effect  
Scroll Display  
Group Images  
Auto Rotate  
Resume  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Video System  
Ctrl via HDMI  
Wi-Fi Settings  
Protect  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Time Zone  
Lens Retract  
Rotate  
Favorites  
P Mode  
Mobile Device Connect  
Button  
Photobook Set-u
i-Contra
Eco Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Power Saving  
LCD Brightness  
Start-up Image  
Format  
Certification Logo Display =152  
Redon  
Croppi
Language  
Reset All  
Pnt Tab Menu  
Item  
Ref. Page  
Item  
Select All Images  
Clear All Selections  
Print Settings  
Ref. Page  
Select Images & Qty.  
Select Range  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
Before Use  
Playback Mode FUNC. Menu  
Handling Precautions  
The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or  
subjecting it to strong impact.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Item  
Ref. Page  
Item  
Play Movie  
Ref. Page  
Rotate  
Protect  
Favorites  
Print  
Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that  
generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction or  
erase image data.  
Play Linked Digest Movie =91, 92  
Smart Shuffle  
Image Search  
Slideshow  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry  
soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Group Playback  
Never use cleanerontaining organic solvents to clean the camera or  
screen.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Use a wer bruremove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult,  
cnon Cumer Support Help Desk.  
To ndensatiorom forming on the camera after sudden  
tempe changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to warm  
vironents), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and  
graally adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag.  
ndensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.  
tinuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove  
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has  
evaporated before resuming use.  
Before long-term battery storage, use up the battery pack’s remaining  
charge, remove it from the camera, and store it in a plastic bag or similar  
container. Storing a partially charged battery pack over extended periods  
(about a year) may shorten its life or affect performance.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188  
   
Before Use  
1 – 11 (PC2091/PC2093) or 1 – 13 (PC2047)  
Model numbers indicated in parentheses (=194)  
WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),  
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)  
Specifications  
Supported Channels  
Security  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Camera Effective  
Approx. 16.1 million pixels  
Pixels (Max.)  
30x zoom: 4.5 (W) – 135.0 (T) mm  
(35mm film equivalent: 25 (W) – 750 (T) mm)  
Lens Focal Length  
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent)  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
3.0-type color TFT LCD  
Effective Pixels: Approx. 922,000 dots  
Digital Zoom [Standard]  
25 – 3000 mm  
(Represents the combined focal length of optical and  
digital zoom.)  
LCD Monitor  
File Format  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version 1.1)  
compliant  
Digital Tele-Converter x 40.0 ‒ 1200.0 mm  
Digital Tele-Converter x 50.0 ‒ 1500.0 mm  
P Mode  
Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG)  
Data Type  
Movies: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264; Audio: MPEG-4  
AAC-LC (stereo))  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Numf Shotcording Time, Playback Time  
Hi-speed USB  
HDMI output  
Analog audio output (stereo)  
Analog video output (NTSC/PAL)  
ber of Sh
Eco ode On  
ie Recording Time*1  
Continuous  
Shooting*2  
Playback Time  
Approx. 250  
Interface  
Approx. 360  
Approx. 40 minutes  
Battery Pack NB-6LH  
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40  
Power Source  
Approx. 1 hour, 10 minutes  
Dimensions (Based  
on CIPA Guidelines)  
Approx. 4 hours  
112.7 x 65.8 x 34.8 mm (4.44 x 2.59 x 1.37 in.)  
e under default camera settings, when normal operations are performed, such as  
shooting, pausing, turning the camera on and off, and zooming.  
*2Time available when shooting the maximum movie length (until recording stops  
automatically) repeatedly.  
Approx. 269 g (approx. 9.49 oz.; including the bry pack  
and memory card)  
Approx. 245 g (approx. 8.64 oz.; camera body only)  
Weight (Based on  
CIPA Guidelines)  
Index  
The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement guidelines of the  
Wi-Fi  
Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).  
Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording time may be less  
than mentioned above.  
IEEE 802.11b/g/n*  
* 2.4 GHz band only  
Standards  
Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.  
Transmission  
Methods  
OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)  
DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b)  
Infrastructure mode*1, Ad hoc mode*2  
*1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup  
*2 Wi-Fi Certified IBSS  
Communication  
Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
     
Before Use  
change depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.  
Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card  
Recording will automatically stop when the clip file size reaches 4 GB, or when the  
recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59 seconds when shooting in  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Number of Shots per Memory Card  
(Approx. shots)  
Compression  
Ratio  
Recording Pixels  
[
], [  
] or [  
], or approximately 1 hour when shooting in [  
].  
8 GB  
32 GB  
Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been reached on some  
memory cards. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended.  
1058  
4272  
(Large)  
16M/4608x3456  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
1705  
1996  
3069  
4723  
8469  
27291  
40937  
6883  
8059  
Flash Range  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
(Medium 1)  
8M/3264x2448  
50 cm – 3.5 m (1.6 – 11 ft.)  
1.0 – 2.0 m (3.3 – 6.6 ft.)  
Maximum wide angle (j)  
Maximum telephoto (i
12391  
19064  
34184  
P Mode  
(Medium 2)  
3M/2048x1536  
Shooting Rang
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Maximum Wide Angle Maximum Telephoto  
110150  
165225  
ShoFocusinange  
(Small)  
0.3M/640x480  
(j)  
1 cm (0.4 in.) – infinity 1.4 m (4.6 ft.) – infinity  
1 m (3.3 ft.) – infinity 8 m (26 ft.) – infinity  
(i)  
The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions and may  
change depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.  
The values in the table are based on 4:3 aspect ratio. The number of shotable  
varies by aspect ratio (=46).  
5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity 1.4 m (4.6 ft.) – infinity  
1 – 50 cm  
r modes  
e*  
(0.4 in. – 1.6 ft.)  
Recording Time per Memory Card  
1 cm (0.4 in.) – infinity 1.4 m (4.6 ft.) – infinity  
f*  
Recording Time per Memory Card  
Image Quality  
* Not available in some shooting modes.  
Index  
8 GB  
32 GB  
30 min. 03 sec.  
2 hr. 01 min. 27 sec.  
Continuous Shooting Speed  
43 min. 29 sec.*1  
2 hr. 03 min. 55 sec.  
5 hr. 14 min. 34 sec.  
2 hr. 55 min. 43 sec.*2  
8 hr. 20 min. 32 sec.  
21 hr. 10 min. 38 sec.  
Shooting Mode  
Speed  
G
Approx. 3.1 shots/sec.  
*
Approx. 8.5 shots/sec.  
* Up to four shots at once during continuous shooting  
*1 26 min. 22 sec. for iFrame movies (=66).  
*2 1 hr. 46 min. 33 sec. for iFrame movies (=66).  
The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions and may  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190  
           
Before Use  
Shutter Speed  
Battery Pack NB-6LH  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Type:  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
[
] mode, automatically set range  
1 – 1/3200 sec.  
Nominal Voltage:  
Nominal Capacity:  
Charging Cycles:  
3.7 V DC  
1060 mAh  
Approx. 300 times  
15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1,  
0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10,  
1/13, 1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60,  
1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320,  
1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250,  
1/1600, 1/2000, 1/2500, 1/3200  
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)  
Available values in [M] mode (sec.)  
Dimensions:  
Weight:  
34.4 x 41.8 x 6.9 mm (1.35 x 1.65 x 0.27 in.)  
Approx. 22 g (approx. 0.78 oz.)  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Battery Charger C-2LY/CB-2LYE  
Aperture  
P Mode  
Rated Input:  
0 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz), 0.085 A (100 V) – 0.05 A (240 V)  
f/number  
f/3.2 – f/8.0 (W), f/6.9 – f/8.0 (T)  
Rated Output:  
Charging e:  
Charg:  
2 V DC, 0.7 A  
f/3.2, f/3.5, f/4.0, f/4.5, f/5.0, f/5.6, f/6.3, f/6.9,  
f/7.1, f/8.0  
prox. 2 hr. (when using NB-6LH)  
rging: orange / Fully charged: green  
(tndicator system)  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Available values in [B] mode*  
* Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available.  
Operatatures: 0 – °C (32 – 104 °F)  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
   
Before Use  
Editing  
Cropping...................................... 107  
Servo AF ....................................... 78  
Focusing range  
Index  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
i-Contrast..................................... 109  
My Colors.................................... 108  
Red-eye correction...................... 109  
Resizing images.......................... 106  
Macro ............................................ 74  
Manual focus................................. 74  
Center (AF frame mode)...................... 76  
Clock.................................................... 26  
Color (white balance)........................... 72  
Compression ratio (image quality)....... 82  
Connecting via an access point......... 124  
Connecting without an access point.. 129  
Continuous shooting............................ 79  
A
AC adapter kit............................ 156, 159  
Accessories ....................................... 156  
AE lock ................................................ 70  
AF frames............................................ 76  
AF lock................................................. 79  
Aspect ratio.......................................... 46  
AUTO mode (shooting mode)........ 16, 28  
AV cable ............................................ 159  
Av (shooting mode) ............................. 85  
Focus lock ........................................... 76  
FUNC. menu  
Editing or erasing connection  
information......................................... 142  
Basic operations............................ 23  
Table.................................... 182, 188  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Erasing .............................................. 101  
Error messages ................................. 175  
Exposure  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
G
GPS..................................................... 91  
GPS information display...................... 91  
Grid lines ............................................. 48  
High-speed burst HQ  
(shooting mode) ............................ 64  
P Mode  
AE lock.................................... 70  
Compensatio.................... 69  
FE loc.......................... 81  
Creative filters (shooting mode)........... 57  
Creative Shot (shooting mode)............ 53  
Cropping.................................... 107, 164  
Custom white balance......................... 72  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Eye-.............................. 2  
H
B
Handheld nightscene  
(shooting mode)................................... 56  
F
Batteries  
Date/time (date/time battery)  
AiAF F frame mode)................ 76  
........................................... 40  
f-timer (shooting mode).......... 63  
s............................................ 105  
ock................................................. 81  
File numbering................................... 151  
Fireworks (shooting mode).................. 56  
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode).......... 58  
Flash  
Power saving................................. 21  
HDMI cable........................................ 157  
D
Battery charger.............................. 2, 156  
High-speed burst HQ  
(shooting mode)................................... 64  
Date/time  
Battery pack  
Adding date stamps ................. 38  
Changing.................................. 15  
Date/time battery...................... 15  
Settings .................................... 1
World clock........................... 1
Charging........................................ 12  
Eco mode.................................... 148  
Level............................................ 178  
Power saving................................. 21  
Household power............................... 159  
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode)............... 30  
I
Black and white images....................... 73  
Blink detection..................................... 49  
Index  
DC coupler.....................................59  
i-Contrast..................................... 71, 109  
iFrame movies (movie mode).............. 66  
Image quality  
Defaults  
Reset all  
Digital tele-converter............................ 75  
Digital zoom......................................... 34  
Display language................................. 16  
DPOF................................................. 167  
Drive mode .......................................... 79  
Deactivating flash.......................... 80  
Flash exposure compensation ...... 81  
On ................................................. 80  
Slow synchro................................. 80  
C
Compression ratio (image quality)  
Images  
Display period ............................... 51  
Erasing........................................ 101  
Camera  
Reset all ...................................... 152  
Camera access point mode............... 129  
Focusing  
CameraWindow (computer)....... 121, 160  
CameraWindow (smartphone)............119  
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY........114, 116  
AF frames...................................... 76  
AF lock .......................................... 79  
AF-point zoom............................... 49  
MF peaking ................................... 75  
Playback  
Viewing  
Protecting...................................... 98  
E
Image stabilization............................... 82  
Eco mode .......................................... 148  
192  
 
Before Use  
Image Sync........................................ 139  
Indicator............................................... 26  
ISO speed............................................ 71  
Self-timer ............................................. 37  
P
T
2-second self-timer........................ 37  
Customizing the self-timer............. 38  
Face self-timer (shooting mode) ... 63  
Wink self-timer (shooting mode) ... 62  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Package contents.................................. 2  
Photobook set-up .............................. 169  
PictBridge .................................. 156, 163  
Terminal............................. 157, 159, 163  
Toy camera effect (shooting mode) ..... 59  
Tracking AF ......................................... 77  
Traveling with the camera ................. 147  
Troubleshooting................................. 172  
TV display.......................................... 157  
Tv (shooting mode).............................. 85  
L
Playback  
Viewing  
Sending images................................. 133  
Sending images to a computer...........115  
Sending images to another camera....116  
Sending images to a printer................116  
Sending images to a smartphone.......115  
Sending images to Web vices .......114  
Sepia tone imag...................... 73  
Servo AF.............................. 78  
Shoo
Lamp.................................................... 50  
Live View Control (shooting mode)...... 54  
Low light (shooting mode) ................... 56  
Portrait (shooting mode)...................... 55  
Poster effect (shooting mode) ............. 57  
Power ................................................ 156  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
AC adapter kit  
Battery pack  
M
V
P Mode  
Macro (focusing range)........................ 74  
Magnified display................................. 96  
Manual focus (focusing range)............ 74  
Power saving....................................... 21  
Printing .............................................. 163  
Program AE......................................... 69  
Protecting ............................................ 98  
P (shooting mode) ............................... 69  
Viewing................................................ 18  
Image search ................................ 93  
Index display ................................. 93  
Magnified display .......................... 96  
Single-image display..................... 18  
Slideshow...................................... 96  
Smart Shuffle ................................ 97  
TV display ................................... 157  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Memory cards........................................ 2  
Recording time............................ 190  
Menu  
Stime  
Dtime  
Shomation ................ 178  
show....................................... 96  
Basic operations............................ 24  
Table............................................ 180  
R
Shuf..................................... 97  
hutter hooting mode) ........... 61  
hooting mode)......................... 61  
(shooting mode)......................... 56  
Soft focus (shooting mode).................. 60  
Software  
Red-eye correction.................... 47, 109  
Remote shooting ........................... 141  
Reset all........................................ 152  
Resizing images........................... 10
Resolution (image size)................. 4
Rotating.......................................4  
Mercury lamp correction...................... 47  
Metering method.................................. 70  
Miniature effect (shooting mode)......... 58  
Mobile device connection button....... 137  
Monochrome (shooting mode)............. 60  
Movies  
W
White balance (color)........................... 72  
Widescreen (resolution)....................... 46  
Wi-Fi functions....................................113  
Wi-Fi menu ........................................ 123  
Wink self-timer (shooting mode).......... 62  
World clock........................................ 147  
Index  
Installation................................... 121  
Saving images to a  
computer ............................. 136, 161  
Editing ..........................................110  
Image quality (resolution/  
frame rate)......................... 46, 48, 67  
Recording time............................ 190  
S
Saving images to a computer.... 136, 161  
Screen  
Sounds .............................................. 146  
Stereo AV cable................. 156, 157, 159  
Strap................................................ 2, 12  
Wrist strap  
Strap  
Z
M (shooting mode)............................... 86  
Multi-area White Balance .................... 47  
My Colors .................................... 73, 108  
Display language........................... 16  
Icons.................................... 178, 179  
Zoom ....................................... 17, 28, 34  
Zoom framing assist............................ 35  
Super slow motion movie  
(movie mode)....................................... 66  
Menu  
FUNC. menu, Menu  
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards  
Super vivid (shooting mode)................ 57  
Memory cards  
Searching ............................................ 93  
193  
Before Use  
Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.  
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be  
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio  
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make  
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that Canon  
accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of  
earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.  
The camera’s model number is PC2091/  
PC2093/PC2047. To identify your model,  
check the label on the bottom of the camera  
for a number beginning with PC. The built-in  
WLAN module model is written below.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or  
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and reset  
the product to its deault settings (erase settings) if necessary.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Country/Region of Purchase  
U.S.A., Canada  
Other  
WLAN Module Model  
P Mode  
Canon will not makcompensation for damages resulting from loss or  
theft of the prct
WM224  
WM223  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Canepts no ponsibility for damages or loss resulting from  
uaccess use of target devices registered on this product  
dutheft of tproduct.  
Be suse the product as directed in this guide.  
suro use the wireless LAN function of this product within the  
elinenoted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for  
ages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other than  
escribed in this guide.  
Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:  
Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical  
equipment or other electronic equipment.  
- Altering or modifying the product  
- Removing the certification labels from the product  
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other  
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.  
Index  
According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations, export  
permission (or service transaction permission) from the Japanese  
government is necessary to export strategic resources or services  
(including this product) outside Japan.  
Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls  
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to  
or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
   
Before Use  
Unauthorized network access  
Radio Wave Interference Precautions  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to  
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.  
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access  
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain  
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where  
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to  
cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).  
This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio  
waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as  
possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time  
as this product.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly  
secure your Wi-Fi neork.  
P Mode  
Only use this ceraWi-Fi function with a proper understanding of  
Wi-Fi security, ance risk and convenience when adjusting security  
settin
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Security Precautions  
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions  
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.  
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.  
The cama can print to PictBridge-compatible printers  
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy  
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices  
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS over IP  
enables PictBridge connections in network environments,  
and the camera is also compatible with this standard.  
Only use networks you are authorized to use.  
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and plays the  
results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to usunknown  
networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to conct to or  
using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized accesse sur
to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to  
connect to other unknown networks.  
Index  
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may  
occur.  
Transmission monitoring  
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and  
attempt to acquire the data you are sending.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
 
Before Use  
Battery Charger CB-2LY  
FCC/IC Notice  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Model: PC2091 (including WLAN Module Model WM224, FCC ID: AZD224)  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
Before Use  
FCC Notice  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
(Digital Camera, Model PC2091 systems)  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Trademarks and icensing  
P Mode  
Microsoft and Winws are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Coratiin the United States and/or other countries.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Macand MaS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the  
Uer count.  
App hone, and Pad are trademarks of Apple Inc.  
he SC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.  
MI, thHDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are  
marks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.  
iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.  
Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™  
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.  
Index  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.  
This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard  
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding  
MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and  
non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the  
AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted  
or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
Before Use  
Disclaimer  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.  
All measurements based on Canon testing standards.  
Information subject to change without notice, as are product specifi  
cations and appearance.  
Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the  
actual equipment.  
Auto Mode / Hybrid  
Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any  
loss arising from the use of this product.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198  

Billion Electric Company Network Router 7300GX User Manual
Black Box Switch express ethernet switch User Manual
Bose Speaker System SoundDock User Manual
Briggs Stratton Lawn Mower MODEL 290000 User Manual
BRK electronic Carbon Monoxide Alarm CO400B User Manual
Califone Headphones 3068AV User Manual
Canon Camera Lens 2045B002 User Manual
Carrier Air Conditioner ASPAS1CCA007 User Manual
Chamberlain Safety Gate SW 2000 X3 User Manual
Chromalox Electric Heater PG421 1 User Manual